JP7565612B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a pachinko machine, a typical gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a start winning hole on the gaming board, an internal lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to a specific gaming state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a display device installed in the gaming area begins to display changing patterns (see Patent Document 1).

In recent years, various proposals have been made to prevent games from becoming monotonous and to increase players' interest (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-59448 A

However, conventional gaming machines do not seem to be providing sufficient entertainment value, and there is still room for improvement.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is capable of transitioning a gaming state from a first gaming state, which is a winning game in which a prize ball can be awarded by winning a variable winning device, to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and is configured to be able to play predetermined audio data from an introduction portion corresponding to the start of a specific period from a predetermined point in time to the end of the first gaming state, and is configured to be able to execute a special presentation that can suggest the start of the second gaming state when the introduction portion and subsequent portions are played back when the specific period of the first gaming state is longer than the length of the introduction portion of the predetermined audio data.

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery. This is a diagram showing a win/lose table that stores the random number values that will result in a jackpot. A diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to the allocation destination of each type of jackpot. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process. A figure showing a flowchart of the winning processing for the starting gate. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process. A figure showing a flowchart of a game play control process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. A figure showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a display duration. A figure showing a flowchart of a game state transition process. A figure showing a flowchart of the large prize opening and closing process. A figure showing a flowchart of the large prize opening processing. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when the opening and closing execution mode is ended. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing data configurations stored in the ROMs, where FIG. 3A shows the data configuration stored in the ROM 93 and FIG. 3B shows the data configuration stored in the common ROM 96. 9 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of a register 952 included in the sound output LSI. FIG. A figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the audio and light emission control device. A figure showing a flowchart of the performance determination process. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states, etc. 1 is a diagram illustrating the game flow that unfolds in a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13A to 13C are sequential diagrams showing examples of presentation images corresponding to the varying and stopping display of special symbols. A series of diagrams showing an example of a mode transition effect that is executed when the ``most advantageous result'' is obtained in the normal state. 13A to 13C are sequential diagrams showing examples of presentations at the time of a jackpot (opening/closing execution mode). A figure showing a flowchart of the performance type (performance category) selection process in the first embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of another example of the performance type (performance category) selection process of the first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a transition process to a fourth mode M4 in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a transition process to a fourth mode M4 in the first embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of the transition processing to effect MA in the first embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of the transition process to the performance MB in the first embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of the transition process to the performance MC in the first embodiment. A figure explaining the data used in the transition process to the fourth mode M4 presentation in the second embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of the transition processing to the effect MA in the second embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of the transition process to the performance MB in the second embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of the transition process to the performance MC in the second embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration for controlling the execution of the presentation of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration of a register according to the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of sequence data according to the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of an acoustic/light ROM according to the third embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of the large prize opening and closing process in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an ending period determination table stored in the ROM of the main control device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting an ending period according to a fourth embodiment. 13 is a diagram for explaining the timing of RUSH entry and RUSH right-hit navigation in the fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a transition process to a fourth mode M4 in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing a notification timing determination table for entering RUSH and right-hit navigation for RUSH stored in the ROM of the audio and light-emitting control device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating another example of the flowchart of the transition process to the fourth mode M4 in the fourth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating another example of the transition process to the fourth mode M4 in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of another example of the performance transition processing to the fourth mode M4 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a transition process A to a fourth mode M4 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a transition process B to a fourth mode M4 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a transition process C to a fourth mode M4 in the fourth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the timing of the performance type (performance category) selection process in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of the performance type (performance category) selection process in the fifth embodiment. A figure for explaining the timing of entering RUSH and the notification of right-hit navigation for RUSH in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a transition process to a fourth mode M4 in the fifth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating another example of the transition process to the fourth mode M4 in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of another example of the performance transition processing to the fourth mode M4 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a transition process D to a fourth mode M4 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a transition process E to a fourth mode M4 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a transition process F to a fourth mode M4 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of a transition process G to a fourth mode M4 in the fifth embodiment.

[First embodiment]
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a typical pachinko machine will be used as an example of the gaming machine. In the following description, "front,""back,""left,""right,""upper," and "lower" refer to the gaming machine as viewed from the front (player's side).

<Pachinko Machines>
As shown in Figure 1, the gaming machine 10 (hereinafter, pachinko machine 10) according to the first embodiment comprises a rectangular outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front of this outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is a fixed frame formed in a rectangular shape with openings at the front and back, and is installed vertically on a mounting frame stand (not shown) in an amusement parlor. The gaming machine main body 12 comprises an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable toward the front (player side), a front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable toward the front (player side), a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable toward the rear (opposite side from the player), and a locking device 14. A prepaid card-type ball dispensing device (CR unit) (not shown) is provided on the left side of the outer frame 11.

The inner frame (not shown) is supported on either the right side or the left side of the outer frame 11, with either the right side or the left side serving as the support side. The front door frame 13 is supported on either the right side or the left side of the inner frame, with either the right side or the left side serving as the support side. The back pack unit is supported on either the right side or the left side of the inner frame, with either the right side or the left side serving as the support side. The locking device 14 is provided on the lower part of the right side or the left side of the gaming machine main body 12 (lower right side in FIG. 1), and has the function of making the gaming machine main body 12 unopenable relative to the outer frame and the function of making the front door frame unopenable relative to the inner frame. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the locking device 14 is a cylinder lock. In the first embodiment, when the key is inserted and then turned right, the function of making the gaming machine main body 12 unopenable relative to the outer frame is released, and when the key is turned left, the function of making the front door frame 13 unopenable relative to the inner frame is released.

The front door frame 13 is arranged to cover the entire surface of the inner frame and has an elliptical window section 21 that opens in the thickness direction, and a window panel 22 that is fitted into this window section 21 and is made of a see-through glass plate, synthetic resin material, or the like.

The front door frame 13 also has a display lamp device 23 as a light-emitting means arranged above the window section 21, and a speaker unit 24 as a sound output means and navigation means arranged on the upper left and right sides and the lower right side of the gaming machine main body 12. The display lamp device 23 has a light-emitting body (not shown) such as a light bulb in which a light-emitting element such as an LED (light-emitting diode), filament, or discharge element is enclosed in a glass spherical shell. The speaker unit 24 can output voice and sound effects. The display lamp device 23 and the speaker unit 24 are configured to function as a performance execution means by lighting and blinking the display lamp device 23 (light-emitting performance) in accordance with the pattern change performance of the pattern display device 51 described below, and outputting voice and sound effects from the speaker unit 24 (audio performance).

The front door frame 13 also has an upper bulge 25 and a lower bulge 26 below the window 21 that bulge forward (towards the player). The upper bulge 25 and the lower bulge 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The upper bulge 25 has an upper tray 251 that opens upward and serves as a tray for storing game balls. The lower bulge 26 has a lower tray 261 that opens upward and serves as a tray for storing game balls. The upper tray 251 has a bottom that slopes gently from the left to the right and tapers at the right side, and has the function of guiding the stored game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 81 while lining them up one by one.

When game balls become surplus in the upper tray 251, the game balls are discharged into the lower tray 261. In other words, the lower tray 261 has the function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 251. The lower bulge 26 is provided with a lever that can slide left and right, and is configured so that game balls stored in the lower tray 261 are discharged from the bottom of the lower tray 261 when the player slides the lever. In the first embodiment, the upper bulge 25 and the lower bulge 26 are molded integrally with the front door frame 13 at the bottom position of the front door frame 13, and are configured so that the upper bulge 25 and the lower bulge 26 also open and close in accordance with the opening and closing of the front door frame 13.

The pachinko machine 10 also has a launch handle 27 as a launching means located at the lower right position of the gaming machine main body 12. The launch handle 27 is biased in a counterclockwise (left-handed) direction, and when the player rotates the launch handle 27 clockwise (right-handed), the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 is activated, and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 251 are launched one by one toward the gaming area 311 of the gaming board 31. In the first embodiment, the launching operation of the gaming balls by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec). In the first embodiment, the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 is controlled so as not to exceed 100 balls per minute.

The launch handle 27 is configured so that the force with which the game ball is hit by the game ball launching mechanism 81 changes depending on the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, so that as the player rotates the launch handle 27 clockwise (to the right), the force with which the game ball is hit by the game ball launching mechanism 81 gradually increases, and as the player rotates the launch handle 27 counterclockwise (to the left), the force with which the game ball is hit by the game ball launching mechanism 81 gradually decreases. In other words, as the player rotates the launch handle 27 clockwise (to the right), the position on the game board 31 at which the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 reaches moves from the left side to the right side.

The launch handle 27 is also provided with a touch sensor 271 that detects when the player is touching the handle, and a launch stop switch 272 that temporarily stops the launch of game balls. The game ball launch mechanism 81 launches game balls when the launch handle 27 is rotated so that the touch sensor 271 is on and the launch stop switch 272 is off, and the game balls are not launched when the touch sensor 271 is off or the launch stop switch 272 is on.

In addition, the upper surface of the upper bulge 25 is provided with an operation button 28 as an operation means. The operation button 28 is used when selecting a type of performance (type of performance), and the player can select the type of performance by operating the operation button 28. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation button 28 has a decision button 281 located in the center, a left direction button 282 located to the left of the decision button 281, and a right direction button 283 located to the right of the decision button 281. When selecting a type of performance, the player can select a type of performance by pressing the left direction button 282 or the right direction button 283, and can decide the type of performance by pressing the decision button 281 located in the center. In addition, a ball lending button (not shown) for instructing the lending of game balls within the range of the value balance (valuable balance) of the card inserted in the CR unit and a return button (not shown) for instructing the return of the card inserted in the CR unit are arranged on the upper surface of the upper bulge 25.

<Game board 31>
The game board 31 is a substantially rectangular plate member made of plywood or synthetic resin. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has a guide section 34 (hereinafter also referred to as a guide rail) consisting of two rails (an inner rail 32 and an outer rail 33) curved into a substantially circular shape provided on the front (player side). The guide rail 34 has a function of guiding the game balls launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 to the upper left of the game board 31. The player plays the game by operating the launch handle 27 to launch the game balls into a substantially circular game area 311 defined by the guide rail 34. In addition, a return section 31a is provided at the end of the guide rail 34 so that the game balls launched into the game area 311 do not return into the guide rail 34. The game balls shot into the game area 311 are detected by a shot ball detection sensor (not shown) provided in the back pack unit (not shown), and a ball detection signal of the shot ball detection sensor is output to a hall computer (not shown). In the first embodiment, the shot ball detection sensor is provided in the back pack unit, but it may be provided in another location, for example, in the game board 31.

In addition, the game board 31 is processed with a router to form a plurality of large and small openings penetrating the board thickness direction at appropriate positions. In addition, each opening of the game board 31 is provided with a general winning opening 35, a first starting opening 36, a second starting opening 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out opening 39. The position and number of openings formed in the game area 311 of the game board 31 can be changed as needed. The game board 31 is provided with through gates 41 on the left and right sides of the center. A main display device 42 is provided at a position where the player of the game board 31 can see it. A variable display unit 43 is provided in the center of the game board 31. A large number of game nails 44 are provided in the game area 311 of the game board 31, and a rotation guide member 45 (so-called "windmill") is arranged on the right side of the game board 31. The rotation guide member 45 is disposed on the game board 31 so that it can rotate freely when contacted by a game ball flowing down the game area 311. Therefore, when a game ball flowing down the game area 311 comes into contact with the game nails 44 or the rotation guide member 45, the flow direction of the game ball changes irregularly (randomly).

In the first embodiment, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through an opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area 311, but also the case where the game ball continues to flow down the game area 311 without being discharged from the game area 311 after passing through an opening. In order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 39, the entry of a game ball into various winning ports is also referred to as "winning". In addition, the entry of a ball into the through gate 41 refers to a game ball continuing to flow down the game area 311 without being discharged from the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area 311. The entry of a ball into this through gate 41 is also referred to as "winning", just like the entry of a ball into various winning ports.

<Starting entry gate>
As shown in FIG. 2, the first starting hole 36 and the second starting hole 37 are arranged in a vertical positional relationship, that is, in the vertical direction. Here, the first starting hole 36 located on the upper side is a winning hole of a constantly open type that always opens upward in the game area 311. In addition, an electric role (so-called electric tulip (electric chute)) consisting of a pair of opening and closing members 371 configured to open and close the second starting hole 37 is provided on both the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting hole 37 located on the lower side. An electric role drive unit 372 as a drive means is connected to the pair of opening and closing members 371, and the pair of opening and closing members 371 are configured to be displaced to a closed position that closes the second starting hole 37 and an open position that opens it as the electric role drive unit 372 is driven. In the first embodiment, the pair of opening and closing members 371 that open and close the second starting hole 37 are arranged on the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting hole 37, and the pair of opening and closing members 371 are driven to approach and move away from each other as the electric role drive unit 372 is driven.

That is, in the first embodiment, the first starting hole 36 is configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area 311 can always win with a certain probability, and the second starting hole 37 is configured so that the winning probability of the game ball can be changed by driving the electric role drive unit 372. Here, when the opening and closing members 371 provided on both the left and right sides of the second starting hole 37 are displaced to the closed position (hereinafter, electric role closed state), the game ball is prevented from winning at the second starting hole 37, and the probability of the game ball winning at the second starting hole 37 is lower than the probability of the game ball winning at the first starting hole 36. Also, when the opening and closing members 371 are displaced to the open position (hereinafter, electric role open state), the game ball received by the opening and closing members 371 is guided to the second starting hole 37, and the probability of the game ball winning at the second starting hole 37 is higher than the probability of the game ball winning at the first starting hole 36.

In addition, instead of the electric role closed state and electric role open state described above, the electric role device may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 37 (a state in which the game ball can enter, unlike the electric role closed state) and a state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 37.

<Variable prize-winning device>
As shown in Fig. 2, the variable winning device 38 is provided with an opening/closing door (opening/closing member, opening/closing means) 382 formed in a rectangular plate shape that can be freely opened and closed to close a special winning opening 381 (hereinafter, a large winning opening) serving as a special winning means that opens into the game area 311, and is configured to be displaced between a closed state in which the opening/closing door 382 is closed and an open state in which the opening/closing door 382 is opened as a variable winning drive unit 383 serving as a drive means is driven. Note that in the first embodiment, the opening/closing door 382 is configured to swing back and forth to open and close the special winning opening, and Fig. 2 shows a state in which the large winning opening 381 is closed by the opening/closing door 382.

In the first embodiment, the opening and closing door 382 is set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter in a normal state. Then, when the internal lottery is won to switch to the opening and closing execution mode and the mode is switched to, the opening and closing door 382 is set to an open state in which the game ball can enter. The opening and closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening and closing door 382 is set to an open state and the game ball can enter the large prize opening 381. In the first embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode, one round of play is defined as the period from when the opening and closing door 382 is set to an open state until it is set to a closed state again, but the number of times the opening and closing door 382 is opened in one round of play is arbitrary. For example, the number of times the opening and closing door 382 is opened in one round of play may be multiple times (two or more times), in which case the opening and closing door 382 is set to an open state and a closed state multiple times in one round of play.

The player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 38, avoiding the variable display unit 43, by rotating the launch handle 27 to the maximum extent and shifting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit part of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side (so-called right-hand hit).

<Detection sensor>
The game board 31 is provided with detection sensors 501-504 for detecting the entry of game balls near the various winning openings, i.e., the general winning opening 35, the first starting opening 36, the second starting opening 37, and the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38 (see FIG. 4). These detection sensors 501-504 are also arranged on the rear side of the game board 31, with the detection sensor 501 detecting the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 35, the detection sensor 502 detecting the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 36, the detection sensor 503 detecting the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 37, and the detection sensor 504 detecting the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38. The detection sensors 501 to 504 are wired to a main control board 61 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and are configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (game balls obtained by winning) when each detection sensor 501 to 504 detects a game ball (the game ball winning into the various winning holes, such as the general winning hole 35, the first starting hole 36, the second starting hole 37, and the large winning hole 381 of the variable winning device 38).

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when the detection sensor 501 detects a ball entering the general winning hole 35, pays out 3 prize balls when the detection sensor 502 detects a ball entering the first starting hole 36, pays out 2 prize balls when the detection sensor 503 detects a ball entering the second starting hole 37, and pays out 13 prize balls when the detection sensor 504 detects a ball entering the large winning hole 381 of the variable winning device 38. The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the various winning holes is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the first starting hole 36 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second starting hole 37 may be the same. In addition, multiple (two or more) variable winning devices 38 may be provided in the game area 311 of the game board 31, and the number of prize balls paid out for each winning in the large winning opening 381 of these multiple variable winning devices 38 may be different. For example, if two variable winning devices 38 are provided, the number of prize balls paid out for each winning in the large winning opening 381 of each variable winning device 38 may be 13 and 14, respectively.

The outlet 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area 311 of the game board 31, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area 311 through the outlet 39. The outlet 39 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 31, and is equipped with a detection sensor 505 that detects game balls entering the game area 311 (see FIG. 4).

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 506 that is disposed on the rear side of the game board 31 and detects the entry of a game ball (see FIG. 4). The detection sensors 505 and 506 are wired to a main control board 61 disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, but unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning holes, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the outlet 39 or one of the through gates 41.

Note that each detection sensor 501-506 only needs to be able to individually detect the entry of game balls into the various winning holes, and for example, an electromagnetic induction sensor or a transmission type photosensor can be used.

<Picture display>
The main display device 42 has a main display section 46, a display section for game devices 47, and a round display section 48, and is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices, such as a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display device. The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof, and is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. In addition, the distance (gap) between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. For this reason, the game ball is prevented from flowing down the gap between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22, i.e., in front of the main display device 42.

<Main display section 46>
The main display unit 46 includes a first result display unit 461 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the first starting port 36, and a second result display unit 462 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the second starting port 37 (see Figure 4).

<First result display section 461>
The first result display unit 461 executes a variable display of the pattern using the winning of the first starting hole 36 as a trigger, and displays the result of the variable display based on the winning of the first starting hole 36 as a result of stopping the variable display. The result of the internal lottery is displayed. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 36, the first result display section 461 starts blinking and goes off in sequence. The first result display unit 461 is configured to display a plurality of types (types) of special symbols depending on the lighting position (stop result) where the first result display unit 461 is definitely lit. The result of this internal lottery determines whether the mode is switched to the opening/closing execution mode. If the result corresponds to the above, the first result display unit 461 displays the specified stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.

<Second result display section 462>
The second result display unit 462 executes a variable display of the pattern using the winning of the second starting hole 37 as a trigger, and displays the result of the variable display based on the winning of the second starting hole 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. The result of the internal lottery is displayed. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 37, the second result display section 462 starts blinking and goes on and off in sequence. The second result display unit 462 is configured to display multiple types (types) of special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as special symbols) depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitely lit up. If the result corresponds to a transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the second result display unit 462 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening and closing execution mode.

The special chart is a notification pattern that indicates the result of an internal lottery, such as whether or not there is a jackpot (specific game), and the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 are configured to display multiple types of special charts depending on the lighting position of an LED or the like. Specifically, the special charts that can be displayed on the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 are set to include multiple types of special charts as jackpot display results that can indicate a jackpot, and one type of special chart as a miss display result that can indicate a miss. Then, one special chart is determined according to the result of the special chart lottery, and the previously determined special chart is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 as a result of stopping the variable display.

In the following explanation, the change display performed by the first result display unit 461 is referred to as the "special chart 1 change display", and the special chart displayed as a confirmed stop on the first result display unit 461 as a result of the special chart 1 change display is also referred to as special chart 1. Similarly, the change display performed by the second result display unit 462 is referred to as the "second special chart change display", and the special chart displayed as a confirmed stop on the second result display unit 462 as a result of the second special chart change display is also referred to as special chart 2.

<Display unit for character 47>
The display unit 47 for the role performs a variable display of the pattern by using the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 as a result of stopping the variable display. Specifically, the display unit 47 for the role performs a variable display in which the game ball is won and turned off sequentially, and finally displays a plurality of types of normal patterns (hereinafter also referred to as normal patterns) according to the lighting position (stop result) where the display unit 47 for the role is definitely turned on. When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the electric role opening state, the display unit 47 for the role displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the electric role opening state. In this electric role opening state, the opening and closing member 371 of the electric role provided in the second starting hole 37 is in an open state.

<Round display section 48>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot determination is won, one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (specific games) described later is determined. A plurality of types of jackpot games with different numbers of rounds are set for this jackpot game, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game that has been won is notified by the round display unit 48. In the first embodiment, two types of rounds of the jackpot game, "15 times" and "2 times", are set, and the number of rounds is notified by the lighting pattern of the LEDs provided in the round display unit 48. In the first embodiment, the round display unit 48 has two LEDs arranged on the left and right, and when the left LED is lit, it is notified that the jackpot game has the number of rounds of "15 times", and when the right LED is lit, it is notified that the jackpot game has the number of rounds of "2 times".

In the first embodiment, the main display unit 46 and the gambling display unit 47 are configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as segment displays and dot displays, but are not limited thereto, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, CRTs, and dot matrices. In addition, the main display unit 46 and the gambling display unit 47 may be configured to variably display a plurality of characters, a plurality of symbols, a plurality of characters, or a plurality of colors that are switched and displayed, as the patterns to be variably displayed. In the first embodiment, the round display unit 48 notifies the number of rounds of play by a light-emitting display using an LED, but are not limited thereto, and may be configured to notify the number of rounds of play by other types of display devices such as liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, CRTs, and dot matrices. The display areas of the main display unit 46, the device display unit 47, and the round display unit 48 are set to be extremely small compared to the display areas of the notification effects, etc., described below, executed by the pattern display unit 51, so that for a player who is paying attention to the various effects executed by the pattern display unit 51, it is difficult to easily recognize each piece of information when the main display unit 46, the device display unit 47, and the round display unit 48 are lit up.

The variable display unit 43 also includes a pattern display device 51 that variably displays (variably displays or switchably displays) a pattern, which is a type of design. The variable display unit 43 also includes a center frame 52 that is arranged to surround the pattern display device 51. The upper part of this center frame 52 is arranged to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and is configured to prevent inconvenience such as reduced visibility of the display screen G due to falling game balls.

<Pattern display device 51>
The pattern display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and is detachably attached to the game board 31 so that the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 faces the front side (player side) of the game board 31. This pattern display device 51 starts displaying a variation of a pattern when a decorative pattern for performance (hereinafter also referred to as a decorative pattern) is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition (entry of a game ball into the first start hole 36 or the second start hole 37). That is, when the pattern display device 51 executes a variation display in the first result display section 461 of the main display section 46 and when it executes a variation display in the second result display section 462 of the main display section 46, it executes a variation display accordingly. The pattern display device 51 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may employ various conventionally known display devices capable of stopping and varying various patterns, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, etc., as well as a drum-type pattern display device and a dot matrix-type pattern display device.

As shown in FIG. 3, the pattern display device 51 according to the first embodiment has a plurality of pattern display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 that can display the decorative figures in a variable manner, and the decorative figures start to change in each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 when a winning ball is won in the first starting gate 36 or the second starting gate 37. In addition, each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 has an effective stop position for the decorative figures set, and the pattern change performance derives a pattern combination of the decorative figures that are stopped and displayed on the effective stop pattern line L that combines the effective stop positions of each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, Z3. In addition, in the pattern display device 51 according to the first embodiment, three pattern display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 are set in a horizontal line, and one effective stop position for the decorative figures is set for each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, Z3, and a pattern change performance consisting of three rows of decorative figures is performed. That is, one stop pattern effective line L is set on the pattern display device 51 of the first embodiment. In the following description, from the left, they may be referred to as pattern display column Z1, pattern display column Z2, and pattern display column Z3.

The display area of the decorative figures in each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the pattern display device 51 is larger than the first result display section 461 and the second result display section 462, and the decorative figures are displayed much larger than the special figures. Therefore, the player can visually tell whether the combination of patterns displayed on the effective stopped pattern line L of the pattern display device 51 is a jackpot or a miss.

The pattern display device 51 is configured to display the change by moving the decorative figures along a predetermined change direction (vertical direction from top to bottom in the first embodiment) when the pattern change performance starts, and the decorative figures that are displayed changeably are displayed stopped in a predetermined stopping order at the effective stopping positions of each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3. In addition, the pattern display device 51 temporarily displays the decorative figures temporarily stopped at the effective stopping positions of each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 before the pattern change performance ends, and one pattern change performance ends when the decorative figures of each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped. In other words, the pattern change performance (special chart 1 change display and second special chart change display) is executed once from the start of the change of the decorative figures (special chart 1 and special chart 2) based on one start hold information to the final stop.

Here, "changing display" refers to a state in which the decorative figures displayed at the valid stop positions in each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing in a predetermined order. Also, a "confirmed stop" of a decorative figure refers to a state in which a decorative figure is continuously displayed stopped at a valid stop position in each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 for a predetermined special figure change interval time (e.g., 600 ms (milliseconds)). Also, a "temporary stop" of a decorative figure refers to a state in which a decorative figure displayed to remain at a valid stop position in each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 is not continuously stopped for the special figure change interval time. In other words, a temporary stop of a decorative figure includes a state in which a decorative figure is displayed in a fluctuating state at a valid stop position, and a state in which it is displayed stopped for a time shorter than the special figure change interval time.

In addition, the first result display unit 461 and the pattern display device 51 start a special chart 1 change display and a pattern change presentation related to the special chart 1 change display, and the special chart 1 and the decorative chart are displayed as fixed and stopped. Similarly, the second result display unit 462 and the pattern display device 51 start a second special chart change display and a pattern change presentation related to the second special chart change display, and the special chart 2 and the decorative chart are displayed as fixed and stopped. Note that the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 do not display special chart changes simultaneously, and when a special chart change display is being performed on either the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462, the other special chart change display is not performed.

Here, in the pattern display device 51 according to the first embodiment, ten numbers from "0" to "9" are set as basic decorative figures in each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the decorative figures are displayed in a variable manner in each of the pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 in order. The manner in which the patterns are displayed in a variable manner in the pattern display device 51 is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, the number of pattern columns, the direction of scrolling of each pattern column, the number of patterns in each pattern column, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, instead of a number-only form, the pattern in each pattern column may be a combination of a picture and a number, or may be a picture only form. In addition, the decorative figures are classified into a first identification pattern that the player can definitely recognize as a probability variable state (described later) being granted after the end of a jackpot game, and a second identification pattern that the player can undefinitely recognize as a possibility of a probability variable state being granted after the end of a jackpot game.

Here, the first identification symbol may be appropriately set from among the basic decorative symbols, or a special decorative symbol other than the basic decorative symbol may be used. For example, odd-numbered symbols such as "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" or even-numbered symbols such as "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" may be set as the first identification symbol, and even-numbered symbols such as "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" may be set as the second identification symbol. In this way, the player can know whether or not a winning game will be awarded based on the decorative symbols of each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 that are displayed as definite stops at the effective stop positions (effective stop symbol lines L) of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the symbol display device 51. In the first embodiment, the symbol combinations (e.g., "1-1-1", "2-2-2", etc.) in which the same decorative symbols are displayed as definite stops at the effective stop positions of each symbol display column are set as winning symbol combinations.

The symbol combination of the decorative figures that allows the player to recognize this big win becomes the winning display result, and the player is awarded a favorable big win game after the symbol change performance ends. On the other hand, if even one of the symbols in the entire row that is displayed as fixed and stopped at the valid stop positions of the symbol display device 51 is of a different type, it can be recognized from the symbol combination that this is a "miss" which in principle will not award a big win game. The symbol combination of the decorative figures that allows the player to recognize this miss becomes the losing display result.

In addition, the pattern display device 51 displays a pattern combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the displayed special patterns as a result of the special pattern change display in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462. That is, the special patterns displayed in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 correspond to the pattern combinations of the decorative patterns displayed on the pattern display device 51, respectively, and when the pattern change performance ends, the special patterns are fixed and stopped in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, and the decorative patterns are fixed and stopped and displayed in each pattern display column Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the pattern display device 51. Note that the pattern combination of the decorative patterns for the special patterns does not necessarily have to be one-to-one, and pattern combinations of multiple decorative patterns may be made to correspond to one special pattern.

The center frame 52 includes a first hold lamp section 53 provided in the lower left area of the pattern display device 51, a second hold lamp section 54 provided in the lower right area of the pattern display device 51, and a third hold lamp section 55 provided in the upper area of the pattern display device 51.

<Pending lamp>
The first reserved lamp section 53 is provided with LEDs that display the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting hole 36, and the LEDs light up in the same number as the number of reserved game balls. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can reserve up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the first reserved lamp section 53 is also four, which is the same as the maximum number of reserved game balls. In addition, the first reserved lamp section 53 corresponds to the variable display of the first result display section 461 and the pattern display device 51. In other words, the reserved number displayed by the first reserved lamp section 53 is increased by one when a game ball enters the first starting hole 36, and is decreased by one each time the variable display of the first result display section 461 is performed.

The second reserve lamp unit 54 is equipped with LEDs that display the number of reserved game balls that have entered the second start hole 37, and the LEDs light up in the same number as the number of reserved game balls. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can reserve up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs equipped in the second reserve lamp unit 54 is also four, the same as the maximum number of reserved game balls. In addition, the second reserve lamp unit 54 corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 462 and the pattern display unit 51. In other words, the reserved number displayed by the second reserve lamp unit 54 is increased by one when a game ball enters the second start hole 37, and is decreased by one each time the variable display of the second result display unit 462 is performed.

The third reserve lamp unit 55 is equipped with LEDs that display the number of reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 41, and the LEDs light up according to the number of reserved game balls. The third reserve lamp unit 55 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can reserve up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs equipped in the third reserve lamp unit 55 is four, the same as the maximum number of reserved game balls. In addition, the second reserve lamp unit 54 corresponds to the variable display of the device display unit 47. In other words, the number of reserved balls displayed by the third reserve lamp unit 55 is increased by one when a game ball enters each through gate 41, and is decreased by one each time the variable display of the device display unit 47 is performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to inform the player of the number of reserved balls by lighting the LEDs of each reserved lamp unit 53-55, but may be configured in other ways, such as to inform the player of the number of reserved balls that have entered the first start gate 36, the second start gate 37, and each through gate 41 as an image on the pattern display device 51. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four LEDs in each reserved lamp unit 53-55, corresponding to the maximum reserved number of four, but, for example, two LEDs may be arranged side by side, and when the reserved number is "1" to "2", the LEDs "light up" in order from the left or right, and when the reserved number is "3" to "4", the LEDs "blink" in order from the left or right, to inform the player of the reserved number.

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in Fig. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound and light emission control device 90, and a display control device 100. These devices are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power supply and launch control device 80 that supplies the necessary power to the pachinko machine 10 and controls the game ball launch mechanism 81, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the pachinko machine 10 (main control) and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and other components. This board box may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when it is opened. Specifically, the trace means may be a structure in which a board box is formed by joining multiple case bodies, and a joint part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a specific part when each case body is separated, or a structure in which a seal sticker that leaves a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the adhesive object when peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundaries between multiple case bodies. In addition, the trace structure may be a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU (Micro-Processing Unit) 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 63 and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 64 constituting the MPU 62. The MPU 62 is a semiconductor device that integrates the ROM 63 and RAM 64, as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator, into a single chip, and is called a one-chip microcomputer. In the first embodiment, the ROM 63 and RAM 64 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 62, but the ROM 63 and RAM 64 may be integrated into separate chips. In addition, the ROM 63 and RAM 64 are physically separated from each other in the embodiment, but they may be one memory that is not physically separated, and the ROM 63 area and the RAM 64 area may be provided by logical addresses. In this case, for example, a specific area in the RAM may be write-prohibited to have the function of a ROM. The same applies to the MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is used as the main storage device of MPU 62. ROM 63 is a non-volatile memory that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information (data), and is a semiconductor element that cannot be written to. This ROM 63 has multiple areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses, and has various areas such as a win/lose table storage area 631, an allocation table storage area 632, a reach table storage area 633, and a fluctuation table storage area 634. These areas will be explained in detail later.

The RAM 64 is a semiconductor memory in which information can be written and erased as desired. The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is read and executed, and is a volatile memory that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. This RAM 64 has a plurality of areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses, and has various areas such as various counter areas 641, reserved ball storage area 642, electric role reserved area 643, and stop result storage area 644. These areas will be described in detail later. In the first embodiment, volatile memories such as DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) and SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) are used as the RAM 64, but non-volatile memories such as MRAM (Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory) may also be used as the RAM 64.

The MPU 62 has an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 and the multiple detection sensors 501 to 506 provided in the main control unit 60. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control unit 70, and the sound and light emission control unit 90. The sound and light emission control unit 90 and the display control unit 100 connected to the sound and light emission control unit 90 will be described in detail later. In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the electric role drive unit 372 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 371 of the second starting opening 37, the variable winning drive unit 383 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38, the main display unit 46, and the role display unit 47.

Here, the main control board 61 has a driver circuit (not shown), and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 372 to open and close the opening and closing member 371. Also, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 383 to open and close the opening and closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each start gate 36, 37. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes display control of the role display unit 47 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and launch control device 80, which has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 80. The MPU 62 receives power (DC 24V) via the power failure monitoring board 65. The MPU 62 also performs winning judgments (ball entry judgments) for the various winning holes, the out hole 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 501-506. The MPU 62 performs an internal lottery based on the winning judgment for the first starting hole 36 or the second starting hole 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to have the payout device 71 pay out prize balls (game balls obtained by winning) and loan balls (game balls loaned to players) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 60.

The power supply and firing control device 80 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement facility. The power supply and firing control device 80 is equipped with an AC-DC converter that generates the operating power required for the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power to each device. The power supply and firing control device 80 is equipped with a power supply unit for use during power outages, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for use during power outages supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 in the event of a power outage when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The power supply/launch control device 80 executes launch control to cause the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feed device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 251 onto the launch rail, and a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail toward the guide rail 34. When the power supply/launch control device 80 meets certain launch conditions (when the launch handle 27 is rotated, the touch sensor 271 is on, and the launch stop switch 272 is off), it supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball.

In the first embodiment, the game ball launching mechanism 81 of the pachinko machine 10 employs a system in which the game ball is launched by the linear expansion and contraction of a plunger-type solenoid, but the game ball may be launched by the operation of a striking hammer directly connected to the rotation axis of the rotary solenoid, or by the operation of a striking hammer supported at a different position relative to the rotation of the motor. Specifically, in the system in which the game ball is launched by the motor, the motor and the striking hammer are supported at different positions, and the striking hammer is operated by the rotation of a cam connected to the motor. The striking hammer operated by the motor (cam) operates in the opposite direction due to the elasticity of a connected spring or the like to hit the game ball and launch it into the game area 311 of the game board 31. In the system in which the game ball is launched by the rotary solenoid, the game ball is hit by rotating the rotation axis in response to a pulse from the power supply and launch control device 80, and the game ball is launched into the game area 311 of the game board 31. The striking hammer, which is directly connected to the rotary solenoid's axis of rotation, rotates to the support position of the game ball, striking the game ball on the launch rail, and launching the game ball. After the ball is hit, the torque of the rotary solenoid disappears, and the striking hammer rotates in the opposite direction due to the reaction of hitting the stopper and its own weight, and is stopped by the stopper at the position before the operation. In a method of launching a game ball using a plunger-type solenoid, the striking hammer is directly connected to the movable iron core of the plunger-type solenoid, and the game ball is hit by the linear reciprocating motion of this, and the game ball is launched into the game area 311 of the game board 31. In addition, the plunger-type solenoid may be of the type that launches the striking hammer by passing electricity through the solenoid, or of the type that compresses a spring by moving the striking hammer backward by passing electricity, and advances the striking hammer by the elasticity of the spring, thereby striking the game ball.

The ball feed device of the game ball launching mechanism 81 may be either a mechanical type or a magnetic type. In the case of a mechanical type, the ball feed device is operated using the power of the motor that drives the striking hammer. In the case of a mechanical type, the striking hammer and the ball feed device are driven by the same drive source, so that with a simple structure, it is possible to supply game balls one by one to the launch rail according to the timing of the hit. In the case of a magnetic type, the ball feed is operated by an independent solenoid separate from the operation of the striking hammer, and the game balls are supplied one by one to the launch rail. The magnetic type is preferably used when the game ball launching mechanism 81 launches game balls using a rotary solenoid or a plunger-type solenoid.

<Internal lottery>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery. The "internal lottery" refers to a lottery to determine whether or not a specific game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be entered when a game ball enters a start winning hole provided on the game board. As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes the internal lottery by using the values (information) of each counter C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 to determine the occurrence of a jackpot, uses the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the type of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs, and uses the reach random number counter C3 to determine whether or not to generate a reach display. The MPU 62 also uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS to determine the display duration on the main display unit 46 and the pattern display unit 51. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the electric role counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not to open the opening/closing member 371 of the second starting port 37. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 6).

Each counter C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching a predetermined maximum value. Each counter is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in a reserved ball storage area 642 (see FIG. 6) provided in RAM 64 as an acquired information storage means at the timing when a game ball enters the first start hole 36 or the second start hole 37. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric role counter C4 is stored in an electric role reserved area 643 (see FIG. 6) of RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters each through gate 41.

The reserved ball storage area 642 includes a reserved area Ra for the first result display section, a reserved area Rb for the second result display section, and an execution area AE.

The first result display reserve area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas, the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 stores the sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserved information in each area Ra1 to Ra4 in chronological order in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 36, that is, sequentially in each area Ra1 to Ra4 from the value acquired first. Specifically, when the first start hole 36 is entered multiple times in succession, the MPU 62 stores the reserved information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4.

In the first embodiment, the first result display reserve area Ra has four memory areas, so that up to four winning game balls can be reserved in the first starting hole 36. The first result display reserve area Ra also has a memory area for writing the reserved number, which is the number of sets of values of the reserved jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3. The reserved number for the first starting hole 36 is not limited to four and can be any number, for example, 1 to 3, or 5 or more.

The second result display reserve area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means has four storage areas, the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 stores the sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserved information in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 37, that is, in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in order from the value acquired first. Specifically, when the entry into the second start hole 37 occurs multiple times in succession, the MPU 62 stores the reserved information in chronological order in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4.

In the first embodiment, the second result display reserve area Rb has four memory areas, so that up to four winning game balls can be reserved in the second start hole 37. The second result display reserve area Rb also has a memory area for writing the reserved number, which is the number of sets of values of the reserved jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3. The reserved number for the second start hole 37 is not limited to four and can be any number, for example, 1 to 3, or 5 or more.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the pending information stored in the memory area of the first result display unit pending area Ra or the second result display unit pending area Rb when starting the changing display of each result display unit 461, 462.

The electric role reserve area 643 has four memory areas, so up to four winning game balls can be reserved for each through gate 41. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment has two through gates 41, but regardless of which through gate 41 is won, if one of the through gates 41 is won, the winning game ball for the through gate 41 is reserved in the electric role reserve area 643. The number of reserved balls for the second starting hole 37 is not limited to four and can be any number, for example, 1 to 3, or 5 or more.

<Explanation of each counter>
Next, each counter will be described in detail.

<Counter C4 for electric role>
First, the electric role counter C4 will be described. The electric role counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by, for example, adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. The electric role counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is stored in the electric role reserve area 643 of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters each through gate 41. The MPU 62 executes a lottery (electric role opening lottery) on whether or not to open the opening/closing member 371 of the second starting hole 37 based on the value of the electric role counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 643.

<Support mode>
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of modes (hereinafter, support modes) that differ in the frequency with which the opening/closing member 371 is set to the open state, which allows a gaming ball to enter the second starting hole 37. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-frequency support mode in which the opening/closing member 371 is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode in which the opening/closing member 371 is set to the open state relatively frequently.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role opening state is won, the opening/closing member 371 is set to the open state more times and the opening time per time that the opening/closing member 371 is set to the open state is longer than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening/closing member 371 to the closed state during each opening in one electric role opening state is shorter than the opening time per time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time secured as the waiting time between the end of the electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery (the duration of one variable display on the role display unit 47) is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

In the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start hole 37 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the first start hole 36 than the second start hole 37, and in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start hole 37 than the first start hole 36. Also, when the detection sensor 503 detects an entry into the second start hole 37, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., two balls) are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing many game balls.

The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to the above. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery compared to the low-frequency support mode. Also, for example, multiple types of securing times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a short securing time compared to the low-frequency support mode, and may be configured to shorten the average of the selected securing time. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening/closing member 371 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to relatively increase the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 371 to the open state compared to the low-frequency support mode. Also, the types of support modes are not limited to two types and are arbitrary, and may be, for example, three or more types.

<Random number counter for big wins>
Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by, for example, adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 599. Furthermore, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as its initial value each time it makes one loop. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, just like the jackpot random number counter C1.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment uses the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI to perform a jackpot lottery by using a plus method in which the next value (initial value) when the final value of the random number sequence is generated is determined by a random value. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 advances random numbers from the initial value 0 when the power is turned on, and when it counts up to the maximum value 599, the next value is not 0, and the value obtained from the random number initial value counter CINI becomes the initial value. Here, if the initial value 100 is obtained from the random number initial value counter CINI, the jackpot random number counter C1 counts up to 100, 101, 102, and when it counts up to 599, it returns to 0, and when it counts up to 99, it again obtains the initial value from the random number initial value counter CINI random. In other words, in this method, the initial value is changed every time the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, so there is no periodicity in the timing of when a specific random number appears.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer when the game ball enters the first start hole 36 or the second start hole 37. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 64 when the game ball enters the first start hole 36, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 when the game ball enters the second start hole 37. The MPU 62 then executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

Figure 7 is a diagram showing the value of the random number that will be selected to generate a jackpot. Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that will be selected to generate a jackpot is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 631 of the ROM 63 provided as a win/loss information group storage means, as shown in Figure 7.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning/losing lottery modes: a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a jackpot. The winning/losing table includes a winning/losing table for the low probability mode (low probability winning/losing information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a winning/losing table for the high probability mode (high probability winning/losing information group) shown in FIG. 7(b). The MPU 62 performs the lottery for the jackpot by comparing these winning/losing tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

These winning/losing tables have the results of the lottery for multiple jackpots (winning/losing results), including "jackpot winning," "special losing result," and "normal losing result." Specifically, in a game state (low probability state) where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for a jackpot, there are two random numbers that result in a "jackpot winning," as shown in FIG. 7(a). Also, in a game state (high probability state) where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for a jackpot, there are 21 random numbers that result in a "jackpot winning," as shown in FIG. 7(b). Here, the random number value that results in a jackpot winning stored in the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is included in the random number value that results in a "jackpot winning" stored in the winning/losing table for the high probability mode.

The values and numbers of random numbers stored in each hit/miss table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode only needs to have a higher probability of "winning the jackpot" compared to the low probability mode. The value of the random number that results in a "winning the jackpot" stored in the hit/miss table for the high probability mode does not need to include the value of the random number that results in a "winning the jackpot" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, and may include a portion of the value of the random number that results in a "winning the jackpot" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each win/lose lottery mode, any random number value other than the "jackpot win" will result in a loss and not a jackpot. As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results: a "special loss result (small win result)" and a "normal loss result." These loss results have in common that neither of them triggers a transition to the win/lose lottery mode or the support mode. However, they are different in that the "special loss result" triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal loss result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer when a game ball enters the first start hole 36 or the second start hole 37. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 64 when a game ball enters the first start hole 36, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 when a game ball enters the second start hole 37. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (allocation lottery) for the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

Fig. 8 is a diagram showing the values of random numbers related to the allocation destinations of the types of jackpots. As shown in Fig. 8, the values of random numbers related to the allocation destinations of the types of jackpots are stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area 632 (see Fig. 4) of a ROM 63 provided as an allocation information group storage means. The allocation table includes a first allocation table (first allocation information group) shown in Fig. 8(a) and a second allocation table (second allocation information group) shown in Fig. 8(b).
The MPU 62 compares these allocation tables with the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 to execute a lottery for the type of big win.

The first allocation table is a table that is referenced when a lottery is conducted for the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the first result display reserve area Ra to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning at the first start port 36. As shown in FIG. 8(a), the first allocation table allocates multiple allocation results, namely, "low probability result (special allocation result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit few round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", "explicit few round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", and "most favorable result (special allocation result corresponding to high probability)". Specifically, in the first allocation table, of the value "0-29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0-9" (probability 1/3) is allocated to the "low probability result", "10-14" (probability 1/6) is allocated to the "unspecified low round high probability result", "15-19" (probability 1/6) is allocated to the "explicit low round high probability result", and "20-29" (probability 1/3) is allocated to the "most favorable result".

The second allocation table is a table that is referenced when a lottery is performed for the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the second result display reserve area Rb to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning at the second start port 37. As shown in FIG. 8(b), the second allocation table allocates two allocation results, a "low probability result" and a "most favorable result." Specifically, in the second allocation table, of the "0-29" value of the jackpot type counter C2, "0-9" (probability 1/3) is allocated to the "low probability result," and "10-29" (probability 2/3) is allocated to the "most favorable result."

Each allocation result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) A winning/losing lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. (2) A support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. (3) A state of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode.

First, we will explain the differences in the win/loss lottery modes in (1). A "low probability result" is an allocation result in which the win/loss lottery mode is set to a low probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the open/close execution mode ends. This low probability mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win." An "unspecified low round high probability result," "explicit low round high probability result," and "most favorable result" are allocation results in which the win/loss lottery mode is set to a high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the open/close execution mode ends. This high probability mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

Next, we will explain the differences in the support modes in (2). A "low probability result" is an allocation result in which the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening and closing execution mode ends. This high frequency support mode transitions to low frequency support mode when the number of times played reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

An "unspecified few rounds high probability result" is an allocation result that maintains the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode was high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win." An "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most favorable result" are allocation results in which the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. This high frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

The differences in the manner in which the variable winning device 38 is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing execution mode (3) will be explained in detail later.

<Reach random number counter>
Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 36 or the second start hole 37. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 36, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the second start hole 37. Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

When the lottery results in a "normal miss" rather than a "jackpot win," the MPU 62 compares the reach table with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display, and generates the reach display if the lottery determines that the reach display should be generated. The reach table is information on the value of the random number related to the generation of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 4).

Here, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result," the pattern display device 51 displays a combination of patterns having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers as a stop result on the stop pattern effective line L. Also, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "low probability result," the pattern display device 51 displays a combination of patterns having the same even numbers as a stop result on the stop pattern effective line L. Furthermore, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "non-expressed low round high probability result" or "expressed low round high probability result," or if the winning/losing lottery results in a "special loss result" without a "jackpot win," the pattern display device 51 displays a combination of special patterns having different numbers as a stop result on the stop pattern effective line L, rather than a combination of patterns having the same numbers, that would not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the winning/losing lottery.

The reach display occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 when a combination of symbols with the same numbers is finally displayed (when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result" or "low probability result"), regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, the reach display does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 when a special combination of symbols is finally displayed (when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "non-disclosed low round high probability result" or "disclosed low round high probability result" or the allocation lottery results in a "special loss result" without a "jackpot win" in the win/loss lottery).

The reach display is configured such that, among the multiple pattern display columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, specific pattern display columns (in the first embodiment, pattern display column Z1 and pattern display column Z3) are displayed stopped on the effective stopped pattern line L, and the remaining pattern display column (in the first embodiment, pattern display column Z2) is displayed in a variable state (reach display), thereby enabling the player to recognize that a reach state (reach) has occurred. Specifically, the reach display is a pattern combination in which the same decorative figure is displayed stopped in pattern display column Z1 and pattern display column Z3, such as "1 ↓ 1", "2 ↓ 2" ("↓" indicates that it is changing), etc. In addition, the patterns in the specific pattern display columns (pattern display column Z1 and pattern display column Z3) that form the reach display are in a state of provisional stop display, and after the decorative images in the remaining pattern display columns (pattern display column Z2) are displayed as suspended (provisional stop display), the decorative images in all pattern display columns are displayed as definite stopped displays.

By generating a reach display, the pachinko machine 10 can make the player hope that after the variable display has started on the symbol display device 51 and before the specified stop result is displayed, the winner will have won the jackpot in the win/lose lottery and will have been allocated to a low probability result or the most favorable result in the allocation lottery. Note that the manner of the reach display is not limited to this, and some symbol rows may be displayed as still patterns and the remaining symbol rows may be displayed as variable patterns, with a specified character or the like displayed as a moving image in the background, or each symbol row may be displayed in a reduced size or hidden and a specified character or the like displayed as a moving image filling almost the entire display screen G.

In the first embodiment, the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 is equipped with a reach random number counter C3, and the MPU 62 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display by comparing the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642. That is, in the first embodiment, the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display is performed by the main control device 60, but the lottery to determine whether or not to generate this reach display may be configured to be performed by the sound and light emission control device 90.

＜Expected performance＞
The pachinko machine 10 has an expectation effect as a type of variable display of the symbol display device 51. The expectation effect is an effect that makes the player expect that the winning lottery will result in a "jackpot win" after the variable display starts on the symbol display device 51 and before a predetermined stop result is displayed. The aforementioned reach display is also an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "jackpot win" but in a "normal miss result," and the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, the reach display and the advance notice display. The reach display has already been explained, so the advance notice display will be explained below.

<Advance notice>
The advance notice display is an expected effect that makes it easier for an effect to occur when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" or when the winning/losing lottery results in a "special miss" rather than a "jackpot win" than when the winning/losing lottery results in a "normal miss" rather than a "jackpot win". Instead of making the effect easier to occur, this advance notice display may be made to make it easier to select an effect with a low occurrence rate, or these may be combined. In the first embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display is performed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate an advance notice display is performed by the audio and light emission control device 90.

The preview display mode is such that, among the multiple pattern display columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, all of the pattern display columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, or a portion of the pattern columns (e.g., pattern display column Z1) is displayed in a stopped state on the effective stopped pattern line L, and multiple pattern columns (e.g., pattern display columns Z2, Z3) are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G. This preview display occurs both when a reach display is generated and when a reach display is not generated, but is set to be more likely to occur when a reach display is generated than when a reach display is not generated. Note that the preview display is not limited to this, and for example, it may be displayed with a changed background, or the shape of the pattern display columns Z1 to Z3 may be changed.

Finally, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 198. The variation type counter CS is updated at least once each time the normal process described below is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the pattern on the main display unit 46 and the display duration of the pattern on the pattern display device 51 based on a comparison between the variation table and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. The variation table is information on the value of the random number related to the display duration, and is stored in the variation table storage area 634 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 as described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, random numbers are generated by a counter circuit (counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, C4), which is an IC for generating random numbers, and this allows for extremely fast counting compared to program control by software (so-called soft random numbers). Also, in the case of software random numbers, since they are processed as part of the program control of the gaming machine, they impose a burden on the software when memory space is limited, but in the case of hardware random numbers, by generating random numbers using hardware, it is possible to generate random numbers with count values several times higher than those of software random numbers without imposing a burden on the software.

<Various processes executed by the main control device 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing to progress the game, and main processing that is started when the power is turned on. The timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be explained in order below. In addition to the timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 also executes NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the explanation of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process, in which the MPU 62 periodically (eg, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105 as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 reads the state (detection state) of the multiple detection sensors 501-506, determines the state, and stores it in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. If the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 501-504 installed at the various winning ports, including the general winning port 35, the first starting port 36, the second starting port 37, and the large winning port 381, have detected the winning of a game ball, it sets a prize ball command that instructs the payout of a prize ball, and transmits this set command to the payout control device 70. For example, if the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of a game ball, it transmits a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 that instructs the payout of 13 prize balls.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Note that if the random number initial value counter CINI has reached the maximum value when the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value, it resets the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role counter C4 by adding 1 to each of them, and stores the updated values in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, it resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0. In addition, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as its initial value each time it loops around.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the through. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 506 provided in each through gate 41 detects the winning of a game ball, it stores the value of the electric role counter C4 updated in step S103 in the electric role reservation area 643. In addition, the MPU 62 sets a command to execute a variable display of the pattern of the role display unit 47, and causes the role display unit 47 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. In the role display unit 47, a variable display that blinks and changes by sequentially turning on and off is performed based on the command instruction from the MPU 62, and finally, a normal figure is displayed according to the lighting position (stop result) where the role display unit 47 is definitely lit. In addition, the MPU 62 sets a command to instruct the third reservation lamp unit 55 to light up, and transmits this set command to the sound emission control device 90. The sound and light emission control device 90 turns on the third reserved lamp unit 55 based on a command sent from the MPU 62. The maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp unit 55 lights up in the same number as the number of reserved balls.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the starting hole. The winning process for the starting hole is described in detail below.

<Winning process for the starting gate>
10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting hole. In the winning process for the starting hole, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 36 (start entry) based on whether the detection sensor 502 provided in the first start hole 36 has detected the entry of a game ball. If the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that a game ball has entered the first start hole 36 (YES), in step S202, the MPU 62 determines the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserve area Ra, and sets the reserved number as the first start reserve memory number RaN in a specified memory area in the first result display section reserve area Ra. The MPU 62 then processes steps from step S205 onwards.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first start hole 36 (NO), the MPU 62 determines in step S203 whether the game ball has entered the second start hole 37 (start entry) based on whether the detection sensor 503 provided in the second start hole 37 detects the entry of the game ball. If the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the second start hole 37 (NO), the MPU 62 ends the entry process for the start hole. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has entered the second start hole 37 (YES), in step S204, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reserved balls stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit, and sets the reserved number as the second start reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined memory area in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit. The MPU 62 then processes steps S205 and onwards.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines in step S205 whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the first embodiment). If the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory count N is not less than the upper limit value (NO), it ends the winning process for the start port. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory count N is less than the upper limit value (YES), it updates the value of the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) by adding 1 in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process as reserved information in the first free memory area in the result display section reserved area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the start reserved memory number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, it stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process as pending information in the first free memory area of the first result display section pending area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S202, it stores the pending information in the fourth area Ra4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206, which is "4".

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, it stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process as pending information in the first free memory area of the second result display section pending area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN to "3" in step S204, it stores the pending information in the fourth area Rb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206, "4".

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command to turn on the first reserved lamp unit 53 or the second reserved lamp unit 54, and transmits this set command to the audio and light control device 90. The MPU 62 then ends the winning process for the starting hole. The audio and light control device 90 turns on the first reserved lamp unit 53 or the second reserved lamp unit 54 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of game balls that have won in the first starting hole 36 or the second starting hole 37 is four. The first reserved lamp unit 53 or the second reserved lamp unit 54 are lit in the same number (corresponding to) the number of reserved balls.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flow chart of normal processing. The normal processing is a main processing for progressing a game. In the normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. 11. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S309 periodically at a cycle of 4 msec, and when remaining time occurs, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311, and executes steps S312 and onward according to the determination result of step S308. Note that the "remaining time" refers to the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time taken to process steps S301 to S309 from the cycle time (4 msec).

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process to transmit the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize ball command is set, and if it is determined that a prize ball command is set, it transmits the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. In addition, in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for presentation, such as a command corresponding to a presentation for a game round or a command corresponding to a presentation for an open/close execution mode, is set, and if it is determined that a command for presentation is set, it transmits the command for presentation to the sound and light emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 executes an update of the counter CS for the fluctuation type. Specifically, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the counter CS for the fluctuation type by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Note that if the previous value of the counter CS for the fluctuation type has reached the maximum value when the MPU 62 adds 1 to the counter CS for the fluctuation type, it resets the value of the counter CS for the fluctuation type to 0.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game round control process to progress the game round. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes a win/lose lottery and an allocation lottery, and also determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51 and information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46.

In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process to transition the game state. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes transition processes to each game state, such as the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode. The game number control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes a demo display execution determination process. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (e.g., 3 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed after the end of a game round without a new game round being started, and if it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, it transmits a demo command to the sound and light emission control device 90 to start the demo display. The sound and light emission control device 90 starts a demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62. This demo display execution process will be described in detail later.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 3 seconds and the interval at which the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and determines that the start waiting period has elapsed when it reaches 3000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). Furthermore, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 62 resets the count value.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes a process (hereinafter, electric role support process) for controlling the opening and closing of the opening/closing member 371 provided in the second starting port 37. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes an electric role opening lottery based on the value of the electric role counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 643 of the RAM 64, and executes the opening and closing process of the opening and closing member 371 if the electric role opening lottery is won. The MPU 62 also executes display control of the role display unit 47 so as to display the result of the electric role opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes launch control to cause the power supply/launch control device 80 to launch a game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27 clockwise (right). More specifically, the power supply/launch control device 80 excites the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 at a predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 sec) to cause the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch a game ball. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a launch strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27. Specifically, the greater the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, the stronger the excitation, and therefore the stronger the launch strength of the game ball. When certain launch conditions are met (the launch handle 27 is rotated, the touch sensor 271 is on, and the launch stop switch 272 is off), the power supply/launch control device 80 outputs a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. The power outage flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The power outage monitoring board 65 outputs this power outage signal when it confirms the occurrence of a power outage. The power outage flag is cleared the next time the main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears the various flags by assigning 0 to the flags. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets a power outage flag by assigning 1 to a power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power outage flag by assigning 0 to the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is set (YES), it executes the power outage processing from step S312 onwards without executing the processing from step S309 onwards. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits timer interrupt processing from occurring. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM judgment value (a checksum of RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is not set (NO), it determines in step S309 whether it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether a predetermined time (e.g., 4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process. When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that it is not time to execute the next normal process (NO), that is, if the periodic time of 4 msec has not elapsed and there is remaining time, it updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310, and updates the variation type counter CS in step S311. Note that the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process (the periodic time of 4 msec has elapsed).

If the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal processing (YES), i.e., the periodic time of 4 msec has elapsed and no remaining time has occurred, it starts the next normal processing by executing step S301 again.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in Fig. 12. In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. This start-up process includes a waiting time for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the audio and light emission control device 90) to become operable. Specifically, the MPU 62 waits until a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) has elapsed after the power is turned on.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether 1 sec has elapsed, which is the period during which access to the RAM 64 is prohibited (hereinafter, the permission prohibition period). The MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402 until it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed. That is, if the MPU 62 does not determine in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed (NO), it repeatedly executes the process of step S402, and if it determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed (YES), it executes the processes from step S403 onward.

In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number of times reaches 10,000. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission-prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission-prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64. In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided on the power supply and launch control device 80 is on. If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on (YES), it executes the processes in and after step S409. If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not on (NO), it determines in step S405 whether or not a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), it executes the processing from step S409 onwards. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is set (YES), it calculates a RAM judgment value (checksum) in step S406. In step S407, the MPU 62 checks the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM judgment value calculated in step S406 is normal or not. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM judgment value (checksum) calculated in step S406 with the RAM judgment value (checksum) stored in step S313 (processing during power failure) of the normal processing, and if they match, it determines that the RAM judgment value is normal, and if they do not match, it determines that the RAM judgment value is abnormal.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (NO), i.e., if it determines that the checksum values do not match, it executes the processes in and after step S409. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM judgment value is normal (YES), i.e., if it determines that the checksum values match, it clears the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

In the first embodiment, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 is confirmed using a checksum, but the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method other than the method of confirming the consistency of the checksum value. For example, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing a keyword in a specified area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing and determining in the main processing whether the keyword is written correctly. Also, the hash value of CRC (cyclic redundancy check) or MD5 (hash function) may be used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64. The method of calculating the checksum is very simple, and for example, the lowest word of the total of each word in the word string may be used as the code value as it is. Therefore, the validity of the data confirmation by the checksum is less reliable than other error detection codes, but since the algorithm is very simple, it can be calculated without placing a burden on the MPU 62 even with limited memory space.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on (YES), if it determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set (NO), or if it determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal (NO), it executes the processes in and after step S409. Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the working area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and executes initialization of the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the amusement facility can initialize the data stored in RAM 64 by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch when the amusement facility opens for business. The pachinko machine 10 also initializes the data stored in RAM 64 when the power outage monitoring board 65 does not confirm the occurrence of a power outage or when the RAM judgment value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 sends an initialization command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the audio and light emission control device 90) in step S411. The MPU 62 also allows timer interrupt processing to occur in step S412. The MPU 62 then proceeds to normal processing described with reference to FIG. 11. By receiving the initialization command sent in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normal and initializes itself.

<Game Play Control Processing>
13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG. 13. In step S501, the MPU 62 judges whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. When the MPU 62 judges in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in effect (YES), the MPU 62 ends the game round control process without executing the processes in and after step S502. In other words, when the MPU 62 judges that the open/close execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the entry of a game ball into each start hole 36, 37 is detected.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following steps. The MPU 62 also sets the opening and closing execution mode flag when transitioning to the opening and closing execution mode, and clears the opening and closing execution mode flag when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that it is not in the open/close execution mode (NO), it determines in step S502 whether the main display unit 46 is displaying a change, i.e., whether a game round is in progress. If the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 46 is not displaying a change (NO), it executes processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 46 is displaying a change (YES), it executes processing for progressing a game round in steps S506 to S509.

In step S503, the MPU 62 recognizes the number of reserved items stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section and the number of reserved items stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, and determines whether the total number CRN of these reserved numbers is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less (YES), it ends the game play control process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less (NO), it executes a data setting process in step S504 to set the reserved information stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section or the reserved area Rb for the second result display section for consumption of a game round. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 executes a fluctuation start process to start a fluctuation display on the main display section 46 and the pattern display device 51 to consume a game round, and ends the game round control process. The data setting process in step S504 will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described later with reference to FIG. 15.

In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether the main display unit 46 is displaying a changing image, and if it determines that the main display unit 46 is displaying a changing image (YES), it executes the game progress process of steps S506 to S509.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether the display duration time set in step S716 of the variation start process (see FIG. 15) described below has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the value set in the display duration time counter in the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. Note that the value of this display duration time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration time has not elapsed (NO), it executes a process for variable display in step S507. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 46 during the variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game play control process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed (YES), it executes a change end process in step S508. In this change end process, the MPU 62 identifies information (information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46) stored in the RAM 64 in any of steps S710, S713, and S715 of the change start process (see FIG. 15) described below. Then, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 46 so that, at the end of a game round, a symbol corresponding to this identified information is displayed on the main display unit 46 during the change display.

The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 varies depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the gaming facility or the like can check the game result by visually checking the main display unit 46 at the end of a game round. This allows the manager of the gaming facility or the like to easily check whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring, for example, to cause the pachinko machine 10 to behave in the same way as if a lottery had been won to generate a jackpot.

The main display unit 46 has a smaller display area than the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and the patterns displayed in a stopped state on the main display unit 46 are harder for the player to recognize than the pattern display rows Z1 to Z3 displayed in a stopped state on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. Therefore, when a round of play ends, the player will determine whether or not they have won a jackpot by checking the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 rather than the main display unit 46, which increases the attention paid to the display screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound and light emission control device 90. The MPU 62 then terminates the game round control processing. The sound and light emission control device 90 executes processing to end the presentation of that game round based on the fluctuation end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the sound and light emission control device 90 may be configured to end the presentation of the game round on its own without the need to receive a fluctuation end command.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process of step S504 in FIG. 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the data setting process. In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG. 14. In step S601, the MPU 62 judges whether the second start pending memory number RbN of the second result display section reserve area Rb set in step S204 of the above-mentioned winning process for the start port (see FIG. 10) is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 judges in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is "0" or less (YES), it executes the data setting process for the first result display section (for the first start port 36) in steps S602 to S606, and if the MPU 62 judges in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0" or less (NO), it executes the data setting process for the second result display section (for the second start port 37) in steps S607 to S611.

First, the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described. In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending memory count RaN in the reserve area Ra for the first result display section, and updates the value of the first start pending memory count RaN stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display section. In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the reserve area Ra for the first result display section to the execution area AE.

In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process to shift the reserved information stored in the memory area of the first result display section reserved area Ra. This data shift process is a process to sequentially shift the reserved information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reserved information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the reserved information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the reserved information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3. That is, in steps S603 and S604, a shift process of the data stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is executed by the FIFO (First In, First Out) method.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display unit flag is a flag for identifying which of the first result display unit 46 or the second result display unit 462 is to start a variable display when a game round is completed. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag, which indicates that when a game round is completed, the first result display unit 461 is to start a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 36.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command to recognize that a shift of reserved information has been performed, transmits this set shift command to the audio and light control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command includes information to make the audio and light control device 90 recognize that a shift of reserved information has been performed for the reserved information stored in the first result display unit reserved area Ra based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 36.

The sound and light control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first reserved lamp section 53 based on the shift command sent from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound and light control device 90 reduces the number of lights in the first reserved lamp section 53 in accordance with a decrease in the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first start hole 36, i.e., a decrease in the first start reserved memory number RaN stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described. In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending memory count RbN in the reserve area Rb for the second result display section, and updates the value of the second start pending memory count RbN stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display section. In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb2 of the reserve area Rb for the second result display section to the execution area AE.

In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process to shift the reserved information stored in the memory area of the reserve area Rb for the second result display section. This data shift process is a process to sequentially shift the reserved information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 toward the first area Rb1. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reserved information in the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the reserved information in the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the reserved information in the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb3. That is, in steps S608 and S609, a shift process is executed on the data stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display section using a FIFO (First In First Out, FIFO) method.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, which indicates that the second result display unit 462 will start displaying a variable value based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 37 when a game round is played.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command to recognize that the pending information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the audio and light control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command includes information for the audio and light control device 90 to recognize that the pending information stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb has been shifted based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 37. The audio and light control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second pending lamp unit 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the audio and light control device 90 reduces the number of lights in the second pending lamp unit 54 in accordance with a decrease in the number of game balls that have entered the second start hole 37, i.e., a decrease in the second start pending memory number RbN stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb.

As described above, the data setting process in Figure 14 includes a data setting process (S602 to S606) for the first result display unit (for the first start port 36) that sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit for consumption of a play round, and a data setting process (S607 to S611) for the second result display unit (for the second start port 37) that sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit for consumption of a play round. If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start reserved memory count RbN is not "0" or less, it executes a data setting process for the second result display unit without executing a data setting process for the first result display unit. When the MPU 62 determines that there is reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 37, it prioritizes the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit for use in playing an instalment, regardless of whether there is reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display unit based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 36.

<Change disclosure processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process of step S505 in Fig. 13 will be described in detail. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in Fig. 15.

In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S702, the MPU 62 reads out the win/loss table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 7(a)) from the win/loss table storage area 631 of the ROM 63. In addition, if the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode (YES), in step S703, the MPU 62 reads out the win/loss table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 7(b)) from the win/loss table storage area 631 of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes a win/lose determination process in step S704. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result) by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/lose table for the low probability mode read out in step S702 or the win/lose table for the high probability mode read out in step S703. The win/lose result is either a "jackpot win," a "special miss result," or a "normal miss result," and whether in the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the win/lose result is either a "jackpot win," a "special miss result," or a "normal miss result."

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether the result determined in step S704 is a "jackpot win". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win" (YES), it executes the process from step S706 onwards, and if the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win" (NO), it executes the process from step S712 onwards.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win" (YES), then in step S706 it determines whether the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64.

Here, if the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, this indicates that the first result display section 461 will start displaying a variable value based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 36. Therefore, if the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 (NO), then in step S707, it reads out the first allocation table (see FIG. 8(a)) from the allocation table memory area 632 in the ROM 63.

In addition, if the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, this indicates that the second result display section 462 will start to display a variable value based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start hole 37. Therefore, if the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 (YES), then in step S708, it reads out the second allocation table (see FIG. 8(b)) from the allocation table memory area 632 in the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes an allocation determination process in step S709. In this allocation determination process, the MPU 62 determines the result of the allocation lottery (allocation result) by comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the allocation table read in step S707 or step S708.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 461 or the second result display section 462 of the main display section 46, and stores the determined information, i.e., the information related to the symbols to be stopped and displayed, in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 46 by comparing the allocation result determined in step S709 with a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63. This stop result table for the jackpot result specifies the form of the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section 46 differently for each allocation result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the allocation result determined in step S709. Specifically, if the MPU 62 determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result", it sets the low probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is an "unexplicit low round high probability result", it sets the unexplicit low round high probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is an "explicit low round high probability result", it sets the explicit low round high probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is a "most favorable result", it sets the most favorable result flag. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S716 onwards. Note that in the processing of each of the following steps, the MPU 62 determines the allocation result by referring to the presence or absence of a flag set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning/losing result is not a "jackpot win" (NO), then in step S712 it determines whether the winning/losing result determined in step S704 is a "special losing result." If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" (YES), it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" (NO), it executes the processing from step S715 onwards.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a special failure result. In this stop result setting process for a special failure result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 461 or the second result display section 462 of the main display section 46, and stores the determined information, i.e., the information related to the symbols to be stopped and displayed, in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 46 by referring to a stop result table for a special failure result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The form of the symbols set in this stop result table for a special failure result is different from the form of the symbols set in the stop result table for a jackpot result. In step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special failure flag in the RAM 64. In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 refers to the presence or absence of a special failure flag set in the RAM 64 to determine whether the winning or losing result is a "special failure result".

In step S715, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a normal failure result. In this stop result setting process for a normal failure result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 461 or the second result display section 462 of the main display section 46, and stores the determined information in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 46 by referring to a stop result table for a normal failure result that is pre-stored in the ROM 63. Note that the form of the symbols set in the stop result table for a normal failure result is different from the form of the symbols set in the stop result table for a jackpot result and the stop result table for a special failure result.

After executing any one of the processes in steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process for setting the display duration (display duration period) in step S716. The process for setting the display duration (display duration period) will be described in detail later.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal processing described above (see FIG. 11), the MPU 62 transmits the variation command and type command set in step S717 to the audio and light emission control device 90. The audio and light emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and type command transmitted from the MPU 62, which will be described in detail later.

The variable command includes information on the duration of the display, but does not include information on whether a reach display will occur. The type command includes information on the win/loss result and the allocation result. More specifically, the type command includes information on the win/loss result, such as "jackpot win," "special loss result," and "normal loss result." The type command also includes information on the allocation result, such as "low probability result," "non-explicit low round high probability result," "explicit low round high probability result," and "most favorable result." In the following explanation, the win/loss result and allocation result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information on the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 46 to start a variable display based on the result of the determination. Here, if the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, this indicates that the first result display section 461 will start a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 36 when a game round is completed.

Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, it causes the first result display section 461 to start a variable display in step S718. Also, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, it indicates that the second result display section 462 is to start a variable display based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start hole 37 when a game round is played. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, it causes the second result display section 462 to start a variable display in step S718.

<Display duration setting process>
Fig. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display duration setting process. In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in Fig. 16. In step S801, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64. The MPU 62 also determines whether or not a reach display occurs on the symbol display device 51. Specifically, in step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether the allocation result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result."

In step S802, if the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result" (YES), the MPU 62 determines in step S803 whether the win/loss result determined in step S704 of FIG. 15 is a "normal loss result." If the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result is a "normal loss result" (YES), in step S804, it executes a reach occurrence lottery by comparing the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a reach display will occur in the reach occurrence lottery in step S804. If the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that a reach display will occur (YES), in step S806, the MPU 62 refers to a display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the ROM 63. In addition, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the allocation result is not a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result" (NO), if the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result is not a "normal loss result" (NO), or if the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that a reach display will not occur (NO), in step S807, the MPU 62 refers to a display duration table for non-reach occurrence stored in the ROM 63.

In step S808, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S806 or step S807, and then determines the display duration. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the display duration corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained from the fluctuation type counter buffer, based on the reach occurrence display duration table referenced in step S806 or the reach non-occurrence display duration table referenced in step S807. The MPU 62 also sets the display duration determined in step S807 in the display duration counter provided in the various counter area 641 of the RAM 64.

In the first embodiment, as described with reference to steps S804 to S808 in FIG. 16, the MPU 62 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display by comparing the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642, but the lottery to determine whether or not to generate this reach display may be configured to be performed by the sound and light emission control device 90.

Here, in the first embodiment, the display duration table for non-reach occurrence is set so that the display duration is shortened as the number of reserved balls increases. In other words, the display duration when the reserved information related to the first start port 36 is consumed is set so that the display duration is shortened as the number of reserved balls related to the first start port 36 increases. Also, the display duration when the reserved information related to the second start port 37 is consumed is set so that the display duration is shortened as the number of reserved balls related to the second start port 37 increases. If the number of reserved balls exceeds the maximum value (4 balls) and the first start port 36 or the second start port 37 wins, the player can receive the prize balls but cannot win the jackpot lottery. However, as in the present embodiment, by shortening the display duration as the number of reserved balls increases and consuming the game rounds faster, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the maximum number of reserved balls is exceeded and a prize is won (a state in which the player can receive the prize balls but cannot win the jackpot lottery), and a game state that is advantageous to the player can be provided.

In addition, the display duration table for non-reach is set to have a shorter display duration when the support mode is high-frequency support mode compared to low-frequency support mode. In other words, when the number of reserved items is the same, the display duration in high-frequency support mode is set to be shorter than the display duration in low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the display durations in the display duration table for reach and the display duration table for non-reach are set to be different from each other.

In this way, in the first embodiment, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table. Therefore, even if information on whether or not a reach display will occur is not included in the variation command, it is possible to determine whether or not a reach display will occur in the audio and light emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on information related to the display duration. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display will occur. Note that the variation command may also directly include information on whether or not a reach display will occur.

In the first embodiment, the display duration table for non-reach occurrence is shorter as the number of reserved items increases, but it may be set in the opposite relationship to the first embodiment, such as the display duration being longer as the number of reserved items increases, and may be configured so that the display duration does not vary (change) depending on the number of reserved items or support mode. Also, the display duration table for reach occurrence and the display duration table for non-reach occurrence may be the same. In this case, regardless of whether or not a reach occurs, the same display duration table is referenced to determine the display duration corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS obtained from the variable type counter buffer, and set it in the display duration counter provided in the various counter area 641 of RAM 64. Furthermore, a display duration table may be set separately for each of the win/loss result and the allocation result.

<Game state transition processing>
Fig. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914 as shown in Fig. 17. In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game is in the opening and closing execution mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the game is not in the opening and closing execution mode (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processes of steps S902 to S910. If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the game is in the opening and closing execution mode (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes of steps S911 to S914.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that it is not in the open/close execution mode (NO), it determines in step S902 whether the variable display of the main display unit 46 has ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display unit 46 has not ended (NO), it ends the game state transition process. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display unit 46 has ended (YES), it determines in step S903 whether the win/loss result corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the win/loss result is a "jackpot win" or a "special miss result."

If the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/loss result does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode (NO), i.e., that the win/loss result is a "normal miss result", it ends the game state transition process. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/loss result corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode (YES), it sets the open/close execution mode in progress flag in RAM 64, and then determines in step S904 whether the win/loss result is a "special miss result".

If the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" (YES), then in step S905 it sets "2" to the opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter area 641 of the RAM 64. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter that allows the MPU 62 to determine the total number of times the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win", then in step S906 it determines whether the allocation result is a small round high probability result (an "unspecified small round high probability result" or an "explicit small round high probability result").

If the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the allocation result is a few rounds with high probability result (YES), then in step S907 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter area 641 of the RAM 64 to "2". Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the allocation result is not a few rounds with high probability result (NO), that is, if it determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result", then in step S908 it sets the round counter RC to "15". This round counter RC is a counter that allows the MPU 62 to identify the number of rounds of play when transitioning to the open/close execution mode.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with different ending conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a round number-defined mode to which the machine enters when the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" and an opening/closing number-defined mode to which the machine enters when the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."

The round count-defined mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of rounds have been played. Here, the number of rounds corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC. The open/close count-defined mode ends on the condition that a predetermined total number of openings and closings of the large prize opening 381 have been played, or a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 381. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the large prize opening 381 corresponds to the value set in the open/close counter SOC. This open/close count-defined mode does not end on the condition that the number of rounds have been played.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes one opening and closing of the large prize opening 381 for one round of play. One round of play continues until one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) is satisfied. That is, in the first embodiment, after setting the opening and closing door 382 to an open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening and closing door 382 to a closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions (1) and (2).
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls in the big winning hole 381 has reached a predetermined upper limit.

After executing any one of the processes in steps S905, S907, and S908, in step S909, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 to "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time a timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. Note that the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and can be determined arbitrarily depending on the combination of the game state and the winning symbol (special symbol).

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/lose result corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, it sets the timer counter T to the opening waiting time regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the opening waiting time is the same regardless of the type of game result. Note that the opening waiting time is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, for example, to the extent that the player recognizes them as being the same. Also, for example, the opening waiting time may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of "low probability result" or "most favorable result" from a game result other than these.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. Here, the opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode, and the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal processing described above (see FIG. 11). Note that the sound and light emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open/close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (YES), it executes the large prize opening opening/closing process in step S911. The large prize opening opening/closing process in step S911 will be described in detail later.

In step S912, after executing the large prize opening/closing process of step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that at least one of the opening/closing counter SOC value and the round counter RC value is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the opening/closing counter SOC value and the round counter RC value are "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 determines in step S913 whether the timer counter T value is "0" or less.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), it ends the game state transition process. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), it clears the open/close execution mode in progress flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S914, and then executes the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.

Next, the big prize opening opening/closing process of step S911 in FIG. 17 will be described in detail.
Fig. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large prize opening/closing process. In the large prize opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1019 as shown in Fig. 18. In step S1001, the MPU 62 judges whether the large prize opening 381 is open or not. If the MPU 62 judges in step S1001 that the large prize opening 381 is not open (NO), it executes the process from step S1002 onwards. Also, if the MPU 62 judges in step S1001 that the large prize opening 381 is open (YES), it executes the process from step S1006 onwards.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large prize opening 381 is not open (NO), it determines in step S1002 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0". If the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0" (YES), it ends the large prize opening opening/closing process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the values of the opening/closing counter SOC and the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it determines in step S1003 whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0". If the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the large prize opening opening/closing process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the MPU 62 executes the special prize opening process in step S1004. The special prize opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 19.

In step S1005, the MPU 62 sets an open command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing described above (see FIG. 11), the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1005 to the sound and light emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the large prize opening opening and closing processing. Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound and light emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening and closing door 382 has been set to the open state, and executes the specified processing.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large prize opening 381 is open (YES), it determines in step S1006 whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", i.e., whether the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the large prize opening opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), then in step S1007 it determines whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 381. The determination of whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 381 is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the large prize opening 381.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that no winning has occurred in the large prize opening 381 (NO), it ends the large prize opening opening opening process. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a winning has occurred in the large prize opening 381 (YES), it updates the winning counter PC by subtracting 1 from the value in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 ends the large prize opening opening process. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process in step S1010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing door 382 to a closed state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 383.

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal processing described above (see FIG. 11), the MPU 62 transmits the close command set in step S1011 to the audio and light emission control device 90. Based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, the audio and light emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening and closing door 382 has been set to the closed state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether the result is a "special miss result." If the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result is a "special miss result" (YES), it executes the processing from step S1018 onwards, which will be described later.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" (NO), it executes the processing from step S1013 onwards. In step S1013, the MPU 62 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from it. In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. The MPU 62 then ends the large prize opening opening and closing processing.

The value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 specifies the open waiting time from when the opening/closing door 382 is set to the open state, to when it is set to the closed state again, and then when it is set to the open state again. In the first embodiment, the open waiting time is set to 1 sec, but the open waiting time is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode or the progress status.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less (YES), it executes the processing from step S1016 onwards. In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time a timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and can be determined arbitrarily depending on the combination of the game state and the winning symbol (special symbol).

The waiting time for the ending, like the waiting time for the opening, is the same regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be subtly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player recognizes them as the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result that is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result" from a game result that is other than these.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing described above (see FIG. 11), the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound and light emission control device 90. The MPU 62 then terminates the large prize opening and closing processing. The sound and light emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening and closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1010 onward as described above. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result is a "special miss result" (YES), the MPU 62 updates the value of the open/close counter SOC by subtracting 1 from it in step S1018.

In step S1019, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1019 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1015 onwards described above. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1019 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1016 onwards described above.

Next, the large prize opening process of step S1004 in FIG. 18 will be described in detail.
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large prize opening process. In the large prize opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1106 as shown in FIG. 19. In step S1101, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter area 641 of the RAM 64. In step S1102, the MPU 62 judges whether the winning or losing result is a "special losing result". If the MPU 62 judges in step S1102 that the winning or losing result is a "special losing result" (YES), in step S1103, the MPU 62 sets "85" to the timer counter T. As described above, the MPU 62 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a 2 msec cycle. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

In addition, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" (NO), then in step S1104 it determines whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the allocation result is a high probability result in a few rounds (YES), it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103 described above. As described above, the MPU 62 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the allocation result is not a high probability result in a few rounds (NO), it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1105. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1105, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large prize opening 381 in step S1106. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing door 382 to an open state by executing drive control of the variable prize driving unit 383. The MPU 62 then ends the large prize opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1101 specifies the upper limit of the total number of winning balls in the large winning opening 381. The value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or S1105 specifies the upper limit duration from when the opening/closing door 382 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15,000". Specifically, the MPU 62 sets a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than the long-term mode.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 excites the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec to cause the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch game balls. The MPU 62 also sets the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 381 to 8 by setting the winning counter PC to "8". Therefore, since the upper limit duration of the long-time mode (30 sec) is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 381 and the game ball launching cycle, it is easy to make the upper limit of 8 game balls enter the large prize opening 381. In contrast, since the upper limit duration of the short-time mode (0.17 sec) is shorter than the game ball launching cycle, it is difficult to make a game ball enter the large prize opening 381. Note that it is possible to make about one game ball enter the large prize opening 381 depending on the timing.

Next, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S914 of FIG. 17 will be described in detail.
20 is a flowchart showing the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode is ended. In the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode is ended, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1212 as shown in FIG.

In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the allocation result is the "most favorable result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result." If the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the allocation result is the "most favorable result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result" (YES), then in step S1202, the MPU 62 sets a high-frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high-frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step S 1203 , the MPU 62 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 64 .
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is obtained in the win/lose lottery.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the win/lose lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win." The MPU 62 then ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

When the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed, the MPU 62 clears the flags (low probability result flag, non-explicit few rounds high probability result flag, explicit few rounds high probability result flag, and most favorable result flag) set in the RAM 64 according to the allocation result, and the special miss flag. Also, in step S701 of the aforementioned fluctuation start process (see FIG. 15), the MPU 62 determines whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the allocation result is not the "most favorable result" or the "explicit few rounds, high probability result" (NO), it determines in step S1205 whether the allocation result is an "unexplicit few rounds, high probability result." If the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is an "unexplicit few rounds, high probability result" (YES), it determines in step S1206 whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 (YES), it executes the processing from step S1203 onwards described above. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64 (NO), it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1207. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the win/lose lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win". The MPU 62 then ends the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is not a "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" (NO), then in step S1208 it determines whether the allocation result is a "low probability result."

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the allocation result is not a "low probability result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is a "special loss result," it terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
Furthermore, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the allocation result is a "low probability result" (YES), it clears the high probability mode flag in step S1209. This causes the MPU 62 to set the win/lose lottery mode to a low probability mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result becomes anything other than a "low probability result."

In step S1210, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the support mode to the high frequency support mode. In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number of plays counter provided in the various counter area 641 of the RAM 64 to "100". In step S1212, the MPU 62 sets a number of play limit flag in the RAM 64. If the number of play limit flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in RAM 64 and the number limit flag is set, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 play times, which is the termination reference number set in the play number counter, are played. When 100 play times are played, MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag and the number limit flag. As a result, MPU 62 sets the support mode to low frequency support mode. Note that MPU 62 executes these processes as electric role support processes in step S306 of the normal process described above (see FIG. 11), but detailed explanations will be omitted.

In this way, if the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result" or a "high probability result with an explicit few rounds," the game state will transition to high probability mode and high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode (i.e., round number setting mode) ends, regardless of the current game state. The high probability mode and high frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In addition, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, if the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in an "unspecified few rounds high probability result," the game state will transition to the high probability mode and high-frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round number setting mode) ends. The high probability mode and high-frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In contrast, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, if the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in an "unspecified few rounds high probability result," the game state will transition to the high probability mode and low-frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round number setting mode) ends. The high probability mode and low-frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In addition, if the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "low probability result," the game state will transition to low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode (i.e., round number setting mode) ends regardless of the current game state. The low probability mode will continue at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win," and the high frequency support mode will transition to low frequency support mode if 100 game rounds have been played without the win/lose lottery resulting in a "jackpot win."

In addition, if the result of the lottery is not a "jackpot win," i.e., if the result of the lottery is a "special miss" or a "normal miss," the game state will not change.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100>
Fig. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. As shown in Fig. 21, the audio and light emission control device 90 includes an audio and light emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit (RTC), a data input/output circuit, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

The ROM 93 is configured to use memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) for read-only use. The ROM 93 has multiple areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses, and each area stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processing corresponding to the programs. The MPU 92 controls the execution of performances based on instructions from the main control device 60 by executing processing according to the control programs stored in the ROM 93. The ROM 93 is integrated with the CPU on a chip and connected by an internal bus, so it is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity, and specifically, its data capacity is 2 MB.

RAM94 is configured to use memory such as SRAM or DRAM that requires an external power supply to retain data (i.e., volatile storage means) for both reading and writing, allowing random access and requiring less time to read data than ROM93 when compared for the same data capacity. RAM94 has multiple areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses, including various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas. RAM94 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in ROM93 is executed. Note that it is not essential that ROM93 and RAM94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 92 has an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60. The input port of the MPU 92 is also connected to the operation button 28. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the display lamp device 23, the first to third hold lamp units 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, the light-emitting element drive unit 29, the display control device 100, etc. Based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the display lamp device 23, the first to third hold lamp units 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, etc. The MPU 92 also analyzes the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to determine the content of the performance for a predetermined period of time, and transmits a command corresponding to the determined content of the performance to the display control device 100. A signal path provided to connect the MPU 92 and the MPU 102 is used to transmit this command. The audio and light emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) such as a harness with connectors on both ends of a signal line.

When the MPU 92 has determined the content of the performance for a specified period, it executes the light emission control of not only the display control device 100 but also the display lamp device 23. In this case, although FIG. 21 shows that the sound emission control board 91 and the display lamp device 23 are directly connected, this is not limited to this, and a relay board may be interposed between the sound emission control board 91 and the display lamp device 23.

When the MPU 92 has determined the content of the performance for a specified period, it executes drive control of the speaker unit 24. When driving and controlling the speaker unit 24, the sound output LSI 95 and the common ROM 96 are used.

The common ROM 96 is configured to use memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means), for read-only use. The common ROM 96 is not directly connected to the MPU 92, but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 95, so that it is easier to increase the data capacity of the common ROM 96 than the ROM 93; specifically, the data capacity is 1 GB. However, this data capacity is arbitrary and may be 500 MB or 4 GB.

The sound output LSI 95 includes an I/F 951, a register 952, a sound data processing unit 953, a DAC 954, and a data transfer unit 955. The sound output LSI 95 executes control to output sound from the speaker unit 24 according to data transmitted from the MPU 92.

I/F951 is an interface that allows the sound output LSI95 to communicate with the MPU92 via bus B1, which is provided as a group of signal paths for bidirectional communication. Bus B1 connected to this I/F951 is made up of eight signal paths, and data is sent and received between the MPU92 and the sound output LSI95 via each signal path.

The register 952 functions as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used by the sound output LSI 95, and is configured to be used as a read/write memory that requires an external power supply to maintain memory. It also allows random access, and when compared with the same data capacity, it takes less time to read data than the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96.

The register 952 has a data capacity of many bytes so that it can store and hold multiple pieces of data simultaneously, and has a data capacity in kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

The sound data processing unit 953 has the function of converting the sequence data and parameter data sent from the MPU 92 and stored in the register 952 so that they can be used to output sounds, and of creating digital musical sound data using the contents of the conversion result and sound data read from the common ROM 96. The sequence data includes time data indicating the start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, and tone of the sound at a given timing.

The sound data processing unit 953 also has the functionality of multiple sound channels so that it can output multiple different sounds simultaneously, and has the functionality of synthesizing the digital musical sound data created for each sound channel to create digital synthesized musical sound data. Note that the multiple sound channels have the functionality for 16 channels, but this number of channels is arbitrary. Also, by using virtual tracks, it is possible to use a greater number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) than the actual number of sound channels, but a configuration that does not use virtual tracks is also possible.

The DAC 954 is a digital/analog converter and includes an amplifier circuit for analog signals. The DAC 954 has a function of amplifying an analog audio signal obtained by converting the digital musical sound data or digitally synthesized musical sound data created by the sound data processing unit 953 into an analog signal, and then outputting the amplified signal to the speaker unit 24.

The data transfer unit 955 is connected to the common ROM 96 via the bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has the function of transferring data read from the common ROM 96 to the register 952. The bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 955 and the common ROM 96 is composed of 16 signal paths, the number of which is greater than the number of the bus B1 between the MPU 92 and the I/F 951. The data transfer unit 955 reads sound data required for sound output from the common ROM 96 based on the data converted from the sequence data and parameter data in the sound data processing unit 953, and stores the sound data in the register 952.

Here, the data transfer unit 955 not only has the function of transferring sound data required by the sound data processing unit 953 to the register 952, but also has the function of reading data required by the MPU 92 from the common ROM 96 and storing it in the register 952, and transferring the data stored in the register 952 to the MPU 92. The configuration related to data transfer is described below.

<Data Structure of ROM 93 and Common ROM 96>
First, the data configuration of the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 will be described with reference to Fig. 22. Fig. 22(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the ROM 93, and Fig. 22(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the common ROM 96.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), ROM 93 prestores programs and processing data (1), programs and processing data (2), ..., programs and processing data (P) for executing processing for performance control in MPU 92. These programs and processing data include data tables used to execute each performance, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to sound output LSI 95. All of the programs and processing data required for executing processing for performance control in MPU 92 are stored in ROM 93.

The ROM 93 prestores not only the program and processing data (1), program and processing data (2), ..., program and processing data (P), but also light emission data (1), light emission data (2), ..., light emission data (Q) used to control the light emission of the display lamp device 23. Each of these light emission data has information set about the type of light-emitting part of the display lamp device 23 that is to be lit during a specified performance period, the lighting period, and the lighting sequence, and the content of these light emission patterns differs depending on the type of each light emission data. Each of the light emission data stored in the ROM 93 has a different period of light emission control that is the target, and the content of the light emission pattern differs.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22(b), the common ROM 96 stores in advance sound data (1), sound data (2), ..., sound data (S) used to output a predetermined sound from the speaker unit 24. Each of these sound data includes waveform data obtained by sampling melodies and sounds actually produced by musical instruments corresponding to various tones, and for melodies with lyrics, in addition to melodies produced by musical instruments corresponding to various tones, waveform data obtained by sampling voices is included. All of the sound data is stored in the common ROM 96. The sound data stored in the common ROM 96 includes sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music (BGM) and voices used in the performances A to D in FIG. 26 described later, sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voices used in the performances of the first mode M1 to the fifth mode M5 in FIG. 27, and sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voices used in the performances MA to MC in the fourth mode in FIG. 33.

The sound data is digital signal data in which an analog signal is converted into a pulse train at a specified sampling frequency and a specified number of quantized signals by pulse code modulation (PCM). Specifically, the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz and the number of quantized signals is 16 bits. Therefore, sound waveform data consisting of an analog signal for 1 second has a data volume of 1 x 44.1k x 16 bits. Incidentally, the sampling period T1 in this case is 22.7 μsec.

The sound data is set so that it can be read from the common ROM 96 in units of one pulse of pulse code modulated data, i.e., one sample of data. In other words, an address is set for each sample of data, and the data transfer unit 955 of the sound output LSI 95 is able to transfer data from the common ROM 96 in units of one sample of data.

The sampling frequency is not limited to 44.1 kHz, and may be, for example, 32 kHz, 48 kHz, or 96 kHz, as long as good sampling can be achieved. The number of quantized signals is also not limited to 16 bits, and may be a number of bits other than 16 bits, as long as good quantization can be achieved.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 22(b), the common ROM 96 prestores not only sound data (1), sound data (2), ..., sound data (S), but also light emission data (Q+1), light emission data (Q+2), ..., light emission data (R). Each of these light emission data has a different period of light emission control and different light emission pattern contents.

As described above, the light emission data used by the MPU 92 is stored not only in the ROM 93 directly connected to the MPU 92 via a bus, but also in the common ROM 96 connected to the sound output LSI 95. In other words, the light emission data is distributed and stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96.

By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 96 in this way, it is possible to increase the data capacity of the light emission data without increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 93. In particular, as already explained, it is relatively difficult to increase the data capacity of the ROM 93 because it is connected via an internal bus in the MPU 92, and attempting to increase the data capacity requires expanding the internal bus width, which is not easy to address. In contrast, as already explained, it is relatively easy to increase the data capacity of the common ROM 96 because it is not directly connected to the MPU 92 but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 95. And by storing the light emission data in the common ROM 96, it is possible to effectively address the increase in the data capacity of the light emission data.

Furthermore, when setting data in the ROM, a few percent (for example, about 2%) of the total data capacity is generally left blank (unused area). In this case, if the data capacity of the common ROM 96 is assumed to be 1 GB, the blank space will be 20 MB. This data capacity is larger than the data capacity of ROM 93, which is 2 MB. With this configuration, it is possible to use these blank spaces to distribute and store the light emission data.

Furthermore, because the sound data corresponds to melodies and sounds for a certain period of time, the data capacity required for a series of outputs is relatively large. This means that sound data is less flexible in terms of data capacity, which also makes it easy for blanks to occur in the common ROM 96. With this configuration, it is possible to use these blanks to distribute and store light emission data.

The light emission data stored in the common ROM 96 is used by the MPU 92, and when the MPU 92 needs to use the data, the sound output LSI 95 reads the light emission data from the common ROM 96 in response to a transfer command from the MPU 92, and transfers the read light emission data to the MPU 92. This transfer uses the bus B1 connecting the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95. In other words, the light emission data distributed and stored in the common ROM 96 is transferred to the MPU 92 using a signal path for transferring data from the MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 95, or from the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92. This makes it possible to store excess light emission data without increasing the number of signal paths, compared to a configuration in which a ROM other than the ROM 93 is attached externally to the MPU 92 and excess light emission data is stored in that ROM.

Of the programs and processing data used by the MPU 92, and the light emission data, all of the programs and processing data are stored in ROM 93, and a portion of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96, allowing for good data allocation. In other words, if the programs and processing data were allocated to the common ROM 96, a separate program and processing data would be required to transfer the programs and processing data to the RAM 94 of the MPU 92, complicating program design. In contrast, the light emission data is originally stored by determining the address at which the light emission data is stored, reading and transferring the light emission data based on that address, and expanding it so that it can be used, so even if the light emission data is allocated, the program design is unlikely to become complicated.

When a performance command is sent from the main control device 60, the MPU 92 first uses a program to execute a predetermined process corresponding to the command, and uses the light emission data during the execution of the predetermined process to control the display lamp device 23. In other words, the program needs to be read out suddenly in response to the reception of a command from the main control device 60, so the timing of the readout is highly arbitrary, whereas the light emission data is used during the execution of the predetermined process, so the timing of the readout is less arbitrary. In addition, since the light emission data is used on the premise that the predetermined process is executed using the program, the program has a higher priority for reading, and if the reading of the program is delayed, the process will be put into a waiting state. In this situation, the program is stored in the ROM 93, and at least a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96, so that the program can be read out independently by the MPU 92 regardless of the state of the sound output LSI 95, while the amount of data for the light emission data, which tends to be larger than the program, can be increased satisfactorily.

Furthermore, since the configuration is such that not all of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96, but rather a portion of the light emission data is stored in ROM 93 and the remainder is stored in the common ROM 96, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing an extreme increase in the data capacity of the common ROM 96.

<Configuration of Register 952 of Sound Output LSI 95>
Next, the configuration of a register 952 used for issuing a sound output instruction from the MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 95 and for transferring sound data stored in the common ROM 96 from the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the register 952.

As shown in FIG. 23, the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 is provided with areas 9523a-9523e in which data is set when the MPU 92 instructs the sound output LSI 95 to output sound, buffers 9524a-9524e for temporarily storing data read from the common ROM 96 based on a data transfer instruction from the MPU 92, an area 9525 in which data is set when a data transfer instruction is given to the sound output LSI 95, and an area 9526 in which the MPU 92 recognizes the internal state of the sound output LSI 95.

Regarding the above-mentioned areas 9523a to 9526 in more detail, the area includes a plurality of areas 9523a to 9523d for parameters, such as area 9523a for a first parameter, area 9523b for a second parameter, area 9523c for a third parameter, and area 9523d for a fourth parameter, in which data is set when issuing an instruction to output sound. In addition, the area includes area 9523e for sequence data.

In the parameter areas 9523a-9523d, parameter data required for outputting melodies and sound effects is stored, as well as parameter data required for outputting voice. By providing multiple parameter areas 9523a-9523d in this way, multiple sounds can be generated simultaneously. Additionally, the sequence data area 9523e stores the sequence data already described.

Incidentally, since the sound output LSI 95 has the functionality for 16 channels, parameter data for multiple channels (specifically, four) is stored in one parameter area. Also, in a configuration that uses virtual tracks, a larger number of parameters may be stored in one parameter area.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area in which data is set when instructing the MPU 92 to transfer data to the sound output LSI 95. The transfer instruction area 9525 stores address data of the light emission data required by the MPU 92, as well as data that instructs the MPU 92 to transfer the light emission data read from the common ROM 96 to the sound output LSI 95.

Multiple external read buffers 9524a-9524e are provided as areas for temporarily storing data read from the common ROM 96 based on a data transfer command from the MPU 92. The light emission data required by the MPU 92 is temporarily stored in the external read buffers 9524a-9524e, and is transferred to the MPU 92 when the specified read timing arrives.

A flag area 9526 is provided as an area for the MPU 92 to recognize the internal state of the sound output LSI 95. The flag area 9526 is provided, for example, with a read completion flag, and when the transfer of corresponding data from the common ROM 96 to the external read buffers 9524a to 9524e in response to a data transfer instruction from the MPU 92 is completed, the read completion flag is stored with "1" and this fact is recognized by the MPU 92.

All of the above areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and buffers 9524a to 9524e are accessible from the MPU 92, but the areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and buffers 9524a to 9524e are not accessed simultaneously, but the accessible targets are switched. In other words, the number of areas that can be accessed simultaneously by the MPU 92 corresponds to the number of the first to eighth signal paths (eight in this embodiment) that make up the bus B1 between the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95.

Specifically, the first area 9521a corresponding to the first signal path constituting the bus B1 is assigned with an area 9523a for the first parameter and a buffer 9524a for one external read, the second area 9521b corresponding to the second signal path constituting the bus B1 is assigned with an area 9523b for the second parameter and a buffer 9524b for one external read, the third area 9521c corresponding to the third signal path constituting the bus B1 is assigned with an area 9523c for the third parameter and a buffer 9524c for one external read, and the fourth area 9521d corresponding to the fourth signal path constituting the bus B1 is assigned with an area 9523d for the fourth parameter and a buffer 9524d for one external read. In addition, the fifth area 9521e corresponding to the fifth signal path constituting the bus B1 is assigned with an area 9523e for sequence data and a buffer 9524e for one external read.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is assigned as an area corresponding to the sixth signal path that constitutes bus B1, and a flag area 9526 is assigned as an area corresponding to the seventh signal path that constitutes bus B1.

Selectors 9522a to 9522e are provided in the register 952 to correspond to the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e, respectively, and the selectors 9522a to 9522e are used to switch between the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e that the MPU 92 can access. This switching is performed by switching between two values in a selector area 9527 provided in the register 952 to correspond to the eighth signal path that constitutes the bus B1.

In detail, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value "0", the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e correspond to the sound output control areas 9523a to 9523e due to the setting of the areas to be accessed by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. In other words, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value, the MPU 92 can access the areas 9523a to 9523d for each parameter and the area 9523e for sequence data, and can issue a sound output instruction to the sound output LSI 95. In other words, the sound output LSI 95 is in a first interference state with the MPU 92.

When the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value "1", the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e correspond to the external read buffers 9524a to 9524e due to the setting of the areas to be accessed by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. In other words, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value, the MPU 92 can access the external read buffers 9524a to 9524e, and is in a state in which it is possible to read data for which a transfer command has been issued. In other words, the sound output LSI 95 is in a second interference state with the MPU 92.

On the other hand, the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 are not subject to switching by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. Therefore, regardless of the interference state of the sound output LSI 95, the MPU 92 can access the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527.

The display control device 100 comprises a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element that combines the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit on a chip. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 controls the VDP 105 based on commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, the MPU 102 analyzes the commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 90, and controls the VDP 105 by generating commands for the VDP 105 based on the results of this analysis.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data. It is a non-volatile memory that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information, and is a semiconductor element that cannot be written to. This program ROM 103 has various areas, such as a performance data storage area 1031. These areas will be explained in detail later.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 103 is executed, and is a volatile memory that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. This work RAM 104 has various areas such as a various counter area 1041 and a various flag storage area 1042. These areas will be described in detail later. In the first embodiment, a volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM is used as the work RAM 104, but a non-volatile memory such as MRAM may also be used.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 51. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. Based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 102, the VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 and stores this image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 prestores various image data (image information) including sprite data for the designs and characters displayed on the pattern display device 51, background data, and moving image data, and functions as an image data library. This character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data for various designs, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the color to be expressed by each dot in the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 51, and the display contents of the pattern display device 51 can be changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 107.

Returning to the explanation of the sound and light emission control device 90, the MPU 92 recognizes that it is necessary to start the presentation for the game round by receiving a change command transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes the presentation start process for the game round. In addition, by receiving an end command transmitted from the main control device 60, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the presentation for the game round, and executes the presentation end process for the game round. In addition, by receiving various commands for the big win presentation transmitted from the main control device 60, it recognizes that it is necessary to start or progress the big win presentation, and executes the big win presentation process. In addition, by receiving a command for the demo display transmitted from the main control device 60, it recognizes that it is necessary to start the demo display, and executes the demo display process. Note that the command reception from the main control device 60 in the MPU 92 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 60, and it may be a configuration in which the command is received relayed by a relay board.

In the game round performance start process, based on both the variation command and the type command, a variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time (display duration) of the corresponding game round, a reach display grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of a reach display, a jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of a jackpot result, and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot result occurring are executed. In addition, based on the grasping results of the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, a display performance grasping process for determining the type of display performance to be performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 in this game round is executed, and a pattern type grasping process for determining the type of pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 in this game round is executed. Then, based on the results of each of these grasping processes, a variable pattern command including information on the variable display time and information on the type of display performance, and a pattern designation command including information on the type of pattern to be finally stopped and displayed are sent to the display control device 100.

In addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, the game-time performance start process also executes a lottery process for a preview display to determine whether or not a preview display will be performed. In this case, the lottery process also executes a lottery for the type of preview display. If the preview display is generated, a preview command including information on the type of preview display is sent to the display control device 100. In addition, the game-time performance start process reads out the light emission data (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data (including sequence data and parameter data) for the game time from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 based on the results of the above-mentioned processes, and specifies the light emission mode of the display lamp device 23 and the output mode from the speaker unit 24.

In the game play presentation end process, the light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 24 for the current game play are ended. In the game play presentation end process, an end command including information to end the game play presentation is sent to the display control device 100. In the jackpot presentation process, the presentation mode at the opening, each round, between rounds, and at the ending, etc. is grasped based on the various commands for the jackpot presentation received, and a command for the jackpot presentation corresponding to the grasped result is sent to the display control device 100. In addition, based on the grasped result, the display data for the jackpot presentation, the sequence data for the jackpot presentation, the parameter data, the sound data, and the light emission data are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and the light emission mode of the display lamp device 23 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 24 during the jackpot presentation are specified.

In the demo display process, the presentation mode of the demo display is determined based on the received demo display command, and a demo display command corresponding to the determination result is sent to the display control device 100. Also, based on the determination result, light emission data (including sequence data and parameter data) for the demo display and sound data (including sequence data and parameter data) for the demo display are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and the light emission mode of the display lamp device 23 by the light emitting element drive unit 29 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 24 during the demo display are specified. Note that the processes executed by the MPU 92 based on the command sent from the main control device 60 include processes for controlling the light emission of the various lamp units 53 to 55 in addition to the above processes.

The MPU 92 also recognizes that the operation button 28 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the operation button 28 based on the operation of the operation section of the operation button 28, and executes an operation response process. When the operation state is released, the MPU 92 also recognizes this by the falling edge of the operation signal, and executes an operation response process. In the operation response process, the operation mode is identified according to the type of operation signal, and an operation occurrence command including information that the operation button 28 has been operated and information about the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 100. In addition, in the operation response process, when the operation of the operation section is released (canceled), an operation release command is transmitted to the display control device 100. In addition to transmitting the above commands, the operation response process also specifies the light emission mode by the light emitting element drive section 29 and the sound output mode from the speaker section 24 so as to correspond to the operation of the operation button 28.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the audio and light emission control device 90>
24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the sound and light emission control device 90. The MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 executes the timer interrupt process to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1305 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the received command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order in which they were received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads the commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they were stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1302, the MPU 92 executes a presentation determination process based on a command received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. In the presentation determination process, the MPU 92 executes presentations for a game round, presentations for an open/close execution mode, and the like. In step S1303, the MPU 92 executes a demo display execution process based on a command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes a demo display if a predetermined waiting period for starting a demo (e.g., 3 sec) has elapsed after the end of a game round without a new game round being started. The presentation determination process in step S1302 will be described in detail later.

In step S1304, the MPU 92 executes a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display lamp device 23 and the first to third hold lamp units 53 to 55 based on the contents of the performance determination process in step S1302 and the demo display execution process in step S1303. In step S1305, the MPU 92 executes a voice control process for voice-controlling the speaker unit 24 based on the contents of the performance determination process in step S1302 and the demo display execution process in step S1303. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device 90>
25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process. The MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1415 as shown in FIG.

In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received a variation command and a type command transmitted from the MPU 62. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that it has not received any of the commands (NO), it executes the processing in step S1409 and thereafter. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that it has received any of the commands (YES), it determines in step S1402 whether or not the game result is a "most favorable result" or a "low probability result" based on the content of the type command.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1402 that the game result is the "most favorable result" or the "low probability result" (YES), it executes a pattern determination process corresponding to the type of game result in step S1403. In this pattern determination process, if the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most favorable result," it determines information related to a combination of patterns having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers (e.g., "1-1-1" or "2-2-2") as the final stop result to be displayed on the effective stop pattern line L, and if the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result," it determines information related to a combination of patterns having the same even numbers (e.g., "2-2-2") as the final stop result to be displayed on the effective stop pattern line L. The odd and even numbers are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1402 that the game result is not the "most favorable result" or the "low probability result" (NO), in step S1404, it determines whether the game result is a "normal loss result" or not based on the content of the type command. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1404 that the game result is not a "normal loss result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the game result is any of a "special loss result", a "non-expressed low round high probability result", and a "expressed low round high probability result", it executes a common symbol determination process in step S1405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines, instead of a combination of symbols having the same number, a special symbol combination (e.g., "3, 4, 1") having different numbers that will not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the winning/losing lottery. This special symbol combination will be the same regardless of the game outcome.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1404 that the game result is a "normal miss result" (YES), it executes a pattern determination process for a normal miss in step S1406. In this pattern determination process for a normal miss, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information related to the combination of symbols in the reach display as the final stop result to be displayed on the effective stop pattern line L. The combination of symbols in the reach display is determined randomly by drawing lots or the like. When the MPU 92 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines information related to a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as the final stop result to be displayed on the effective stop pattern line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines by drawing lots or the like a combination of symbols different from any of the combinations of symbols having the same number, the combination of special symbols, and the combination of symbols in the reach display.

After executing any one of the processes in step S1403, step S1405, or step S1406, the MPU 92 executes a process of determining a presentation pattern in step S1407. In this process of determining a presentation pattern, the MPU 92 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to data previously stored in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In addition, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selected presentation pattern.

In step S1408, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1403, S1405, and S1406, and a pattern command including the presentation pattern selected in step S1407. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the presentation for the game round on the pattern display device 51 from the presentation data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103 based on the stop result command and pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes the presentation for the game round based on the presentation pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90, and finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the stop pattern effective line L.

After executing the process of step S1408, or if it is determined in step S1401 that the variation command and type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processes from step S1409 onward. In step S1409, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1409 that it has not received an opening command (NO), it executes the processing in step S1413 and subsequent steps. Also, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1409 that it has received an opening command (YES), it determines in step S1410 the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S1411, the MPU 92 executes a process for determining the effect for the open/close execution mode that corresponds to the type of game result determined in step S1410. In the process for determining the effect for the open/close execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1410 that the game result is a "special miss result" or an "unspecified few rounds high probability result," it selects effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode.

If the MPU 92 determines that the game result is an "explicit few rounds high probability result", it selects effect B as the effect for the opening and closing execution mode. If the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "most favorable result", it selects effect C as the effect for the opening and closing execution mode. If the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", it selects effect D as the effect for the opening and closing execution mode. The duration of effects A and B corresponds to the time when the large prize opening 381 is opened and closed twice in a short time mode during the opening and closing execution mode. The duration of effects C and D corresponds to the time when the large prize opening 381 is opened and closed 15 times in a long time mode during the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, in step S1411, the MPU 92 performs light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and performs audio control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selection result of effects A to D.

In step S1412, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for the opening and closing execution mode, including information related to the performance for the opening and closing execution mode selected in step S1411. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the performance for the opening and closing execution mode on the pattern display device 51 based on the command for the opening and closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec period) occurs. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes the performance for the opening and closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S1412, or if it is determined in step S1409 that an opening command has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S1413 whether or not to generate a presentation type selection process that allows the player to select a mode presentation after the end of the big win game, and executes the presentation type selection process according to the result of the determination. This presentation type selection process will be described in detail later.

In step S1414, the MPU 92 executes a presentation transition process. In the presentation transition process, the MPU 92 executes a process for transitioning to the mode presentation after the end of the big win game selected in step S1413. Details of the presentation transition process in step S1414 will be described later.

In step S1415, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for progressing the performance for the open/close execution mode and the performance after the open/close execution mode ends, for example, based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 then ends the performance determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status, etc.>
The relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described below. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state. Specifically, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the "normal miss result" and the game state, with the game results arranged in columns and the game states arranged in rows. As shown in FIG. 26, the pachinko machine 10 has, as game results excluding the "normal miss result", the win/loss results of "jackpot win" and "special miss result", and the allocation results of "non-expressed low round high probability result", "expressed low round high probability result", "most favorable result", and "low probability result".

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in Figure 26, a "special losing result" is a game result that is selected when the winning/losing lottery does not result in a "jackpot win" (indicated by the symbol x in the figure). The allocation result is a game result that is selected when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" (indicated by the symbol circle in the figure). Below, the relationship between game results excluding "normal losing results" and game states, etc. will be explained. Note that in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between game results and game states, etc. as follows, but the combination of game results and game states, etc., the content of the game results, and the content of the game states, etc. are arbitrary.

In the case of a "special losing result", the opening/closing execution mode changes to a specified number of opening/closing mode rather than a specified number of rounds mode, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode. Also, in the case of a "special losing result", there is no transition to a win/lose lottery mode. In the case of an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode changes to a specified number of rounds mode in which rounds are played with a maximum of two times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode. Also, in the case of an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", the winning/lose lottery mode changes to a high probability mode. In this way, although the "special losing result" and the "unspecified few rounds high probability result" have different types of opening/closing execution modes, they are common in that the opening and closing of the large prize opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode.

In addition, in the case of a "special miss result" and an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", the stopping result will be a special combination of symbols, and the presentation for the opening and closing execution mode will be presentation A. This presentation A includes a presentation for the opening of the opening and closing execution mode, a presentation for the situation in which the variable winning device of the opening and closing execution mode is being opened and closed, and a presentation during the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, and is configured as a series of presentations. In addition, in the case of a "special miss result" and an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", the support mode does not change. In addition, in the game round after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the pattern display device 51 does not display an image on the display screen G indicating that it is a high probability mode.

Therefore, by checking the stop result or effect A, the player cannot know whether the game result is a "special miss result" or a "non-disclosed few-round high probability result." In other words, even if the allocation lottery results in an "non-disclosed few-round high probability result" and the game transitions to the high probability mode, the pattern display device 51 will disguise the game as if the win/lose lottery mode had not transitioned in the game round after the open/close execution mode ends. For this reason, the player can enjoy playing while guessing whether the win/lose lottery mode has transitioned to the high probability mode.

In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode transitions to a round number regulation mode in which round play is performed with a maximum number of times set to two, and the opening and closing of the large winning port 381 is performed twice in a short time mode. In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the winning/losing lottery mode transitions to a high probability mode. In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the stopping result is a combination of special symbols, and the performance for the opening and closing execution mode is performance B. This performance B includes a performance for the opening of the opening and closing execution mode, a performance in the state in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, and a performance during the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, and is configured as a series of performances. In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game round after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 51 displays an image on the display screen G indicating that it is a high probability mode. Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "expressed few rounds high probability result" by checking the stopping result and the performance for the opening and closing execution mode.

In the "most favorable result" and "low probability result", the opening and closing execution mode transitions to a round number specified mode in which rounds are played with a maximum of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 381 is performed 15 times in a long period of time. Here, in the "most favorable result", the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers, the winning/losing selection mode transitions to a high probability mode, and the presentation for the opening and closing execution mode becomes presentation C. This presentation C includes a presentation for the opening of the opening and closing execution mode, a presentation for the situation in which the variable prize device is being opened and closed, and a presentation during the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, and is configured as a series of presentations.

In addition, in the case of a "low probability result", the stopping result will be a combination of symbols with the same even numbers, the winning/losing lottery mode will transition to a low probability mode, and the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode will be presentation D. Furthermore, in the case of a "most favorable result" and a "low probability result", the support mode will transition to a high frequency support mode. This presentation D includes a presentation for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, a presentation for the situation in which the variable winning device is opening and closing, and a presentation during the ending of the opening/closing execution mode, and is configured as a series of presentations.

In the first embodiment, the presentation time for each opening performance is the same. Also, in the first embodiment, the presentation time for each ending performance is the same. However, the duration of the opening performance and the ending performance is arbitrary, and the duration of the opening performance and the duration of the ending performance may be different. Also, the presentation time may be different for each game result, i.e., for each opening performance, or only some of the opening performances may have different presentation times. Furthermore, the presentation time may be different for each game result, i.e., for each ending performance, or only some of the ending performances may have different presentation times.

<Game Flow>
27 is a diagram explaining the game flow that unfolds in the pachinko machine 10. When starting a game with the pachinko machine 10, the game starts in the first mode M1. The "first mode" (normal mode) is a game mode in which the winning/losing lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode. In the first mode M1, by inserting a game ball into the first starting hole 36, the special chart 1 starts to change and the game progresses.

In first mode M1, if you win the "non-explicit few rounds high probability result", you will move to second mode M2 (takeoff mode). "Second mode" is a game mode in which the win/loss selection mode is a high probability mode and there is no support mode. Second mode M2 is a mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, and the high probability mode will continue until the next jackpot.

In addition, if you win the "Explicit Few Rounds High Probability Result" in the first mode M1, you will transition to the third mode M3 (flight mode). The "third mode" is a mode in which the win/lose selection mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a game state with no limit on the number of times it can be played. The third mode M3 is a mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, and the high probability mode and support mode will continue until the next jackpot.

In addition, if the "most favorable result" is won in the first mode M1, the game transitions to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). The "fourth mode" is a mode in which the win/lose selection mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a game state with no limit on the number of times it can be played. The fourth mode M4 is a mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, and the high probability mode and support mode continue until the next jackpot. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has multiple types of effects MA to MC (three types in the first embodiment) with different content as the effects of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

In the first embodiment, during the presentation of the "Most Advantageous Result" open/close execution mode, more specifically during a round of play, a presentation type selection presentation is executed to select the presentation type in the fourth mode M4, and an image for selecting the presentation type in the fourth mode M4 is displayed on the display screen G. When the player operates the operation button 28 to select a preferred presentation from presentations MA to MC displayed on the display screen G, the presentation in the fourth mode M4 to which the transition takes place after playing the "Most Advantageous Result" becomes the selected presentation. Note that in the fourth mode M4, the next jackpot is guaranteed, so the fourth mode M4 continues until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, if a "low probability result" is won in first mode M1, the game will transition to fifth mode M5 (revenge mode). "Fifth mode" is a game mode in which the win/lose selection mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 tries. In fifth mode M5, the next jackpot is not guaranteed, and if the player wins another jackpot within the 100 tries limit of the support mode, the revenge will be successful. However, if the player does not win another jackpot within the 100 tries limit of the support mode, the revenge will be unsuccessful, the high frequency support will end, and the game will transition to first mode M1, where the win/lose selection mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode.

Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 27 shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. For example, in the first embodiment, a mode transition is not performed for a special miss result (small win), but as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a "special miss result (small win result)", and although a "special miss result" does not trigger a transition to the win/lose lottery mode or support mode, it does trigger a transition to the open/close execution mode. For this reason, the machine may be configured to transition to a mode transition when a "special miss result" is won.

<Example of a production image>
Next, an example of the effect image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. When an internal lottery for a big win is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines the variation pattern (variation time), and the variation display is performed on the main display unit 46. However, as described above, the display area of the main display unit 46 is set to be extremely small, and it is difficult for a player who is paying attention to the various effects performed on the symbol display device 51 to easily recognize each piece of information in the lit state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. 3, a variation display effect is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 using a decorative figure, which is an effect pattern. Note that the background image is omitted from FIG. 28.

<Before change display>
Figure 28 (A): In the state before the special chart 1 starts to change (not in the demo performance state), a row of decorative charts, which are performance patterns, is displayed large on the screen of the display screen G. At this time, the decorative charts of the pattern display rows Z1 to Z3 are also displayed stopped on the stop pattern effective line L in accordance with the stop display of the special chart 1 or special chart 2.

<Change display performance begins>
FIG. 28(B): In synchronization with the start of the change of the special chart 1, the pattern display columns Z1 to Z3 scroll and change on the display screen of the display screen G, starting the change display performance. That is, in synchronization with the start of the change of the special chart 1 or the special chart 2, the pattern display columns Z1 to Z3 scroll (flow) vertically within the display screen of the display screen G, starting the change display performance. In FIG. 28, the change display of each pattern display column Z1 to Z3 is indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the change display, each performance pattern is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the image (background image) that is the background of the performance pattern is displayed in a state where it is easy to see within the display screen.

In this case, the background image is, for example, a representation of the scenery of an airport or the like. Such a background image represents that the stay mode in the presentation is, for example, the "first mode." In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "first mode" is, as described above, a game state (normal mode) in which the winning/losing lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode. The pachinko machine 10 is also provided with various other presentation modes, and different background images are prepared for each presentation mode. The differences between these modes correspond to the differences between the internal "winning/losing lottery mode" and "support mode." Although not specifically shown in FIG. 28, a preview presentation may then be performed by, for example, displaying an image of a specific character or item on the display screen.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z1>
28(C): When a predetermined time (for example, about half the variable time) has elapsed, the symbol display column Z1 stops variable display first. In this example, the symbol display column Z1 stops displaying the number "8" on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z3>
FIG. 28(D): Following the symbol display column Z1, the symbol display column Z3 stops changing. In this example, it is shown that the symbol display line L is stopped and displayed with a symbol representing the number "3". At this point, it is already confirmed that the ready state will not occur, so it is almost clear from the outside that the current change is a non-reach (normal) change. Note that the ready change due to a slip pattern or the like is excluded here. A "slip pattern" is, for example, a symbol display column that temporarily stops and displays a symbol representing the number "7", then the symbol display column slides by one symbol and displays a symbol representing the number "8", which develops into a ready state. Alternatively, a symbol display column that temporarily stops and displays a symbol representing the number "9", then the symbol slides by one symbol in the opposite direction and displays a symbol representing the number "8", which develops into a ready state. In addition, another possible pattern is that after a performance pattern showing a completely different number such as "5" is temporarily displayed, a character appears on the screen and resumes the varying display of the pattern display column Z3, causing a decorative pattern showing the number "8" to be displayed temporarily, leading to a reach.

<Stop display effect>
Fig. 28(E): In synchronization with the stop display of special pattern 1 or special pattern 2, the last pattern display column Z2 stops changing. If the result of this internal lottery is a non-winning one and special pattern 1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) mode, the decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) combination. That is, in the example shown in Fig. 28(E), a decorative pattern representing the number "1" is displayed on the stop pattern effective line L, and in this case, the decorative pattern combination is a miss of "8, 1, 3", so that the performance shows that the current change corresponds to a normal "miss".

Above, with reference to FIG. 28, an example of the change display and the stop display (when no winning is made) that are performed using decorative symbols for each change has been explained. Through such effects displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation as to whether or not he will win the jackpot, and ultimately the result of the internal lottery can be clearly indicated through the effects.

<Example of changing display>
29 and 30 are sequential diagrams showing an example of the effect C that is executed when the jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery and the result is allocated to the "most favorable result" (so-called first win) in the first mode M1 (a game state in which the win/lose lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode). In the following explanation, matters common to the above-mentioned example of the effect will be omitted. In addition, the illustration of the background image is omitted in these Figs. 29 and 30.

<Before the start of the variable display performance>
29(A): Symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed large on the display screen G. In each of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3, a combination of decorative symbols representing the numbers "9, 1, 3" is displayed in a stopped state.

<Change display performance begins>
FIG. 29(B): The variable display performance begins as the pattern display columns Z1 to Z3 scroll on the display screen G.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z1>
Fig. 29(C): The symbol display column Z1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In Fig. 29(C), a decorative symbol representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z3>
Fig. 29(D): The symbol display column Z3 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In Fig. 29(D), a decorative symbol representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display effect>
Fig. 29(E): The symbol display column Z2 is displayed in a stopped state in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Normally, if the special symbol is displayed as a losing symbol, the decorative symbol, which is the performance symbol displayed on the display screen G, is also displayed in a losing state. However, in Fig. 29(E), the special symbol is displayed in a "most favorable result" state, and the decorative symbol representing the number "1" is displayed in the symbol display column Z2.

<Open/Close Mode Effects>
When the combination of decorative symbols for the big win is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the mode is switched to an open/close execution mode, and the presentation of the open/close execution mode according to the lottery result of the big win is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, presentation C is executed as the presentation of the open/close execution mode for the "most advantageous result" which is the result of the internal lottery.

Figure 30 (F): When the opening/closing execution mode is entered, an opening performance is executed. In this opening performance, for example, the background image displayed on the display screen G is significantly changed, and a text image G1 such as "BONUS!" is displayed significantly on the display screen G, informing the player that he or she has won the jackpot. Note that as long as it is possible to notify the player that he or she has won the jackpot, the notification may be made in other ways (for example, by outputting a sound).

30(G): Next, to inform the player that a right-hand play will be performed, for example, a text image G2 of "Right-hand play!" and a right-pointing arrow are displayed large on the display screen G. At this time, a right-pointing arrow is displayed to the right of the text image G3 of "Right-hand play!" to emphasize that a right-hand play will be performed. In addition, in accordance with the right-hand play notification on the display screen G, a sound such as "Right-hand play!" is output from the speaker unit 24. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable winning device 38 is provided on the right side of the game board 31, and in order to cause the game ball to enter the large winning hole 381 of the variable winning device 38, it is necessary to maximize the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 27 and shift the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area 311 from the side where the exit part of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side (so-called right-hand play), so that the player is notified that a right-hand play will be performed, as shown in FIG. 30(G). The right-facing arrow and the text image G3 saying "Hit right!" may be displayed flowing from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. This allows even players who do not understand Japanese to intuitively understand that right-hit play is to be performed. In the following explanation, the right-hit navigation that suggests right-hit play in a jackpot game state is also referred to as the right-hit navigation for jackpot play.

Figure 30 (H): Following the opening effect, an effect is performed in which the variable winning device is opened and closed. In this effect, for example, a battle effect is performed. This battle effect is performed for the purpose of informing the player that the player's character and the enemy character battle each other and that by winning the battle, the game will move to a high probability mode after the big win. In addition, the upper end of the display screen G displays the word "Right Hit" and multiple right-facing arrows "→" to indicate that right-hit play will continue. In addition, an effect may be performed in which the word "Right Hit" and the right-facing arrows "→" are displayed flowing from the left end of the display screen G to the right end.

Fig. 30 (I): Also, during the presentation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, a presentation type selection presentation is executed in which the player is allowed to select the presentation mode to be used after the opening/closing execution mode ends, as described in step S1413 of Fig. 25. In this presentation type selection presentation, the player presses the left direction button 282 and/or the right direction button 283 of the operation button 28 to select an image showing a preferred presentation type from the images GA to GC showing presentation types displayed on the display screen G. In the example shown in Fig. 30 (I), the image GA is an image showing presentation MA, the image GB is an image showing presentation MB, and the image GC is an image showing presentation MC. When the player presses the operation button 28 to select one of the images GA to GC, the selected image is displayed larger on the display screen G than the other unselected images, making it clear that the image has been selected. After the player selects the desired effect, the effect corresponding to the selected image is determined as the effect for the fourth mode M4 by pressing the decision button 281 of the operation buttons 28.

In the first embodiment, if the player does not select or decide on a preferred effect within a predetermined time, specifically by the 15th round, which is the final round, a predetermined effect (effect MA in the first embodiment) is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4. In the first embodiment, if the player does not select or decide on an effect mode within a predetermined time, an effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G may be automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4 after a predetermined time has elapsed. In the example shown in FIG. 30, effect MB corresponding to the selected image GB (image GB displayed larger than other images on the display screen G) is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4.

In the example shown in FIG. 30(I), the selected image is displayed larger than the other images on the display screen G, but when the player presses the left button 282 and/or the right button 283 of the operation button 28, the images GA to GC corresponding to the effects MA to MC may move to the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 30(J), the image GB corresponding to the effect MB is selected, so the image GB is placed in the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 30(J), the selected image GB is placed in the center of the display screen G to clearly show the selected image to the player, and is displayed on top of the other unselected images GA and GC, making it clear that the image GB has been selected. In addition, the selected image GB may be displayed larger than the other unselected images GA and GC to more clearly show the selected image to the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30(J), the time during which effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed as a gauge. For example, a gauge image G4 showing the time during which effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed below the image GB, and the remaining time during which effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed in red. The red area G4a (shaded area in FIG. 30(J)) of the gauge image G4 may decrease over time, specifically, the boundary line L1 between the red area G4a (shaded area) and the white area G4b (white area) may move leftward toward the display screen G over time. Also, the red area G4a (shaded area in FIG. 30(J)) of the gauge image G4 may increase over time, specifically, the boundary line L1 between the red area G4a (shaded area) and the white area G4b (white area) may move rightward toward the display screen G over time. Furthermore, details of the selected effect, for example, an explanation of what the selected effect is, may be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, attribute information (metadata) describing each performance content is stored in the ROM 93 or the like, and the MPU 92 reads the attribute information (metadata) of the currently selected performance from the ROM 93 based on the operation signal of the operation button 28, and transmits a command to instruct the display control device 100 to display the read attribute information on the display screen G. Also, the attribute information of the performance may be stored in the performance data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103, and the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 may transmit a command to instruct the display control device 100 to read the attribute information (metadata) of the currently selected performance from the performance data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103 based on the operation signal of the operation button 28, and display the same on the display screen G. Also, music used in the currently selected performance may be output from the speaker unit 24. At this time, the music being output in the current performance is stopped once, and the music used in the currently selected performance is output from the speaker unit 24. In this way, by presenting the player with details of the selected effect, the player can more easily select the effect that suits his or her taste, increasing interest.

<Performance type (category) selection process>
Fig. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type (category) selection process. As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 executes the effect type selection process in step S1413 of the effect determination process in Fig. 25. In this effect type selection process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1508 as shown in Fig. 31, thereby allowing the player to select the effect type to be executed in the fourth mode M4.

In step S1501, the MPU 92 determines whether the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1401 of FIG. 25. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), it ends the presentation type selection process.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that the game result is the "most favorable result" (YES), then in step S1502 it determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening command was received. The MPU 92 determines whether the predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S1502 is executed. For example, if the predetermined time is 10 seconds and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S1502 is 2 msec, the MPU 92 counts the number of times the process of step S1502 is executed and determines that 10 seconds have elapsed when the count reaches 5,000 times. The configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). If the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the opening command was received (NO), then the MPU 92 ends the presentation type selection process.

If the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1502 (YES), the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 in step S1503 to start the performance type selection performance. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display an image of the performance type selection performance on the display screen G based on instructions from the MPU 92. As described above, the performance type selection performance allows the player to select from three different performance type modes MA, MB, and MC for the performance of the fourth mode M4 to which the player is transitioned when the player wins a jackpot in the win/lose lottery and is assigned the "most favorable result." The player operates the operation button 28 in this performance type selection performance to select the desired performance mode.

In step S1504, the MPU 92 accepts the player's selection of the presentation type modes MA, MB, and MC using the operation button 28. The player presses the left button 282 and/or the right button 283 of the operation button 28 to select an image corresponding to the desired presentation MA-MC from the images GA-GC displayed on the display screen G. In this step S1504, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. In the display control device 100, based on instructions from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

When the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC based on instructions from the MPU 92. In the display control device 100, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB based on instructions from the MPU 92.

In step S1505, the MPU 92 determines whether the player has operated the operation button 28 to determine the effect, i.e., whether the pressing of the decision button 281 has been accepted. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1505 that the pressing of the decision button 281 has been accepted (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, if the MPU 92 accepts the decision operation with the image GA selected in step S1505, the MPU 92 sets the effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be transitioned to after the first mode M1 in step S1506. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94.

Also, in step S1505, if the MPU 92 receives a confirm operation with image GB selected, the MPU 92 sets the MB effect as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be transitioned to after the first mode M1 in step S1506. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for the MB effect as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. Also, in step S1505, if the MPU 92 receives a confirm operation with image GC selected, the MPU 92 sets a flag for the MC effect as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be transitioned to after the first mode M1 in step S1506. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for the MC effect as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94.

If it is determined in step S1505 that pressing of the decision button 281 has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S1507 whether a predetermined time has elapsed. The MPU 92 determines whether the predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S1507 is executed. For example, if the predetermined time is 10 seconds and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S1507 is 2 msec, the MPU 92 counts the number of times the process of step S1507 is executed and determines that 10 seconds have elapsed when the number of times it has been executed reaches 5,000. The configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC), for example.

If a predetermined time has elapsed in step S1507 (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect (effect MA in the first embodiment) that has been determined in advance by initial setting as the effect in the fourth mode M4 in step S1508. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for effect MA as the effect in the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. Note that, as described above, if a predetermined time has elapsed in step S1507, the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4.

Also, in step S1507, if the specified time has not elapsed (NO), the MPU92 ends the performance type selection process.

<Another example of the performance type selection process>
Instead of measuring a predetermined time in steps S1502 and S1507 in FIG. 31, the determination process in steps S1502 and S1507 may be performed based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game may be counted based on the number of open commands and round start commands (hereinafter also referred to as open commands) received in step S1005 in FIG. 18. In this case, in step S1502, the MPU 92 determines whether the number of open commands received is 3 (third round), and if the number of open commands received is 3, the MPU 92 starts the performance type selection performance in step S1503. In step S1507, the MPU 92 determines whether the number of open commands received is 15 (the 15th round, which is the final round), and if the number of open commands received is 15, the initial setting performance in step S1508 may be set.

Figure 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of another example of the effect type selection process. As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 executes the effect type selection process in step S1413 of the effect determination process in Figure 25. In this effect type selection process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1615 as shown in Figure 32, thereby allowing the player to select the type of effect to be executed in the fourth mode M4.

In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1401 of FIG. 25. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), it ends the presentation type selection process.

If the MPU92 determines in step S1601 that the game result is the "most favorable result" (YES), in step S1602, it sets a counter to count the number of opening commands, etc., received after receiving the opening command.

In step S1602, the MPU 92 determines whether the game state is the third round of a jackpot game. Specifically, after receiving an opening command, the MPU 92 increments a counter each time it receives an open command, etc., and determines whether the number of open commands, etc. received has reached three (third round). If the MPU 92 determines in step S1603 that the number of open commands, etc. received is not three or more (NO), it ends the presentation type selection process.

If the number of open commands or the like received in step S1603 is three or more (YES), the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 in step S1604 to start a performance for selecting a performance type. In the display control device 100, based on instructions from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display an image of the performance for selecting a performance type, specifically the image shown in FIG. 30 (I), on the display screen G.

In step S1605, the MPU 92 accepts the player's selection of the presentation type modes MA, MB, and MC using the operation button 28. The player presses the left button 282 and/or the right button 283 of the operation button 28 to select an image corresponding to the desired presentation mode MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. In this step S1605, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. In the display control device 100, based on instructions from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

When the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC based on instructions from the MPU 92. In the display control device 100, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB based on instructions from the MPU 92.

In step S1606, the MPU 92 determines whether the player has operated the operation button 28 to determine the effect, i.e., whether or not the pressing of the decision button 281 has been accepted. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1606 that the pressing of the decision button 281 has been accepted (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. In other words, if the MPU 92 accepts the decision operation with the image GA selected in step S1606, the MPU 92 sets the effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to which the mode transitions after the first mode M1 in step S1607. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94.

Also, in step S1606, if the MPU 92 receives a confirm operation with image GB selected, the MPU 92 sets the MB effect as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be transitioned to after the first mode M1 in step S1607. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for the MB effect as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. Also, in step S1606, if the MPU 92 receives a confirm operation with image GC selected, the MPU 92 sets a flag for the MC effect as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be transitioned to after the first mode M1 in step S1607. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for the MC effect as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94.

In step S1608, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an open command, etc. has been received. If it is determined in step S1608 that an open command, etc. has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the presentation type selection process. Also, if it is determined in step S1608 that an open command, etc. has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S1609 whether or not the game state is the final round of the jackpot game, i.e., the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving an opening command, the MPU 92 increments a counter each time it receives an open command, etc., and determines whether the number of open commands, etc. received has reached 15 or more (the 15th round), which is the final round.

If it is determined in step S1609 that the number of received open commands, etc. is not 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (NO), the MPU 92 instructs the player in step S1610 to issue a notification to the player to confirm whether or not to cancel the determined effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display a text image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" on the display screen G, asking whether or not to cancel the determined effect. In the display control device 100, based on an instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display a text image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" on the display screen G. The MPU 92 also controls the speaker unit 24 to output the voice "Do you want to cancel the effect?". Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound "Cancel the effect?" stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound "Cancel the effect?" is output from the speaker unit 24. Also, in step S1609, if it is determined that the number of open commands or the like received is 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (YES), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect processing.

In step S1611, the MPU 92 determines whether the effect determined in step S1606 has been canceled. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether the effect has been canceled based on the player's operation of the operation button 28. If it is determined in step S1611 that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 92 returns to the operation of step S1605. Also, if it is determined in step S1611 that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection processing.

If it is determined in step S1606 that the decision button 281 has not been pressed (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S1612 whether or not an open command, etc. has been received. If it is determined in step S1612 that an open command, etc. has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance type selection process. If it is determined in step S1612 that an open command, etc. has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S1613 whether or not the game state is the final round of the jackpot game, i.e., the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments a counter each time an open command, etc. is received, and determines whether the number of open commands, etc. received has reached 15 or more (the 15th round), which is the final round.

If it is determined in step S1613 that it is the 15th round (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect (in the first embodiment, effect MA) that has been determined in advance by initial setting as the effect in the fourth mode M4 in step S1614. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for effect MA as the effect in the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. Note that, if it is determined in step S1613 that it is the final round (the 15th round) (YES), the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. Note that, when the MPU 92 sets the effect in step S1614, it ends the effect type selection effect processing.

Also, if it is not determined in step S1613 that it is the final round (15th round) (NO), the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to make a notification to prompt the player to select and decide on a performance in step S1615. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display text images such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!" on the display screen G to prompt the player to select and decide on a performance, based on instructions from the MPU 92. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display text images such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!" on the display screen G to prompt the player to select and decide on a performance. The MPU 92 also controls the speaker unit 24 to output sounds such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!". Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93, corresponding to sounds such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!", sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that sounds such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!" are output from the speaker unit 24.

The timing at which the effect type selection effect starts is arbitrary, and may be any timing as long as the number of received release commands, etc. is between 1 (1st round) and 15 (15th round). The number of rounds at which the effect type selection effect starts may also be determined randomly using a counter stored in RAM 94. In addition, in the above explanation, the effect can be canceled according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (specifically, the effect can be canceled up to the 14th round), but the effect may also be canceled until a specified time or number of rounds has elapsed.

<Performance transition processing>
Next, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) when a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery and the allocation result is the "most favorable result" will be described. Normally, when a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery, the presentation of the opening/closing execution mode according to the allocation result is executed and the ending period ends, and then the presentation of the next mode begins. However, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery and the allocation result is the "most favorable result," presentation C of the opening/closing execution mode according to the most favorable result is executed. Then, during the ending period of this presentation C, the presentation of the fourth mode M4 begins.

Specifically, the output of music used in the fourth mode M4 performance is controlled to start during the ending period of performance C corresponding to the most favorable result. In the first embodiment, the timing at which music and sound start to be output from the speaker unit 24 changes depending on the type of performance set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process in FIG. 31. Note that in the following description, in the fourth mode M4 performance, the music performance is also referred to as the music performance, and the video performance displayed on the display screen G is also referred to as the video performance.

The transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 33. In the first embodiment, the fourth mode M4 has three types of effects, effects MA to MC, and the transition process differs for each of the effects MA to MC. The transition process for each of the effects MA to MC will be described in detail below. In the following explanation, the right-hit navigation, which is a suggestion for right-hit play when transitioning to the fourth mode (RUSH mode), is also referred to as the right-hit navigation for RUSH.

<Transition process to performance MA>
First, a case where the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the effect MA, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the effect MA of the fourth mode M4 from the start time T1 of the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the "most favorable result". Here, in the effect MA, the ending period of the effect C and the period of the intro part of the music used in the effect MA of the fourth mode M4 are the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro part ends at the end time T2 of the ending period. In addition, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to continuously output the A melody part following the intro part after the output of the intro part of the music ends.

In addition, in the transition process to the MA effect, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the sound "Entering A RUSH" during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the output of the sound "Entering A RUSH" is controlled to start after the sound start time TW1 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and to end the sound output of "Entering A RUSH" simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro portion. Here, the sound start time TW1 is the time obtained by subtracting the output time of the sound "Entering A RUSH" from the output period of the ending period or the intro portion. For example, if the output period of the ending period or the intro portion is 10 seconds and the output time of the sound "Entering A RUSH" is 2 seconds, the sound start time TW1 is 8 seconds. In this case, the sound output of "Entering A RUSH" is controlled to start 8 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

At the end of the ending period T2, the sound "Hit right" is output to suggest right-hit play, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the sound "Hit right" is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). At the end of the ending period T2, the video presentation of the presentation MA is controlled to start. At the end of the ending period T2, the text "Please hit right" or the like to suggest right-hit play may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the sound output of "Hit right", the text "Please hit right" or the like is controlled to be displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

<Transition process to production MB>
Next, a case where the effect MB is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the effect MB, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 from the start time T1 of the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the "most favorable result". Here, in the effect MB, the period of the intro part of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period of the effect C. Therefore, the output of the intro part continues even after the end time T2 of the ending period. In addition, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to continuously output the A melody part following the intro part after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

In addition, in the transition process to the performance MB, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the sound "Entering B RUSH" during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the output of the sound "Entering B RUSH" is controlled to start after sound start time TW2 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and to end the output of the sound "Entering B RUSH" simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro portion. Here, the sound start time TW2 is the time obtained by subtracting the output time of the sound "Entering B RUSH" from the output period of the intro portion. For example, if the output period of the intro portion is 11 sec and the output time of the sound "Entering B RUSH" is 2 sec, the sound start time TW2 is 9 sec. In this case, the output of the sound "Entering B RUSH" is controlled to start 9 sec after the start time T1 of the ending period.

Here, in the transition process to this effect MB, the sound "B RUSH ENTERED" is output from the speaker unit 24 across the end time T2 of the ending period. Therefore, when the sound "Hit right" to suggest right-hit play is output at the end time T2 of the ending period, the sound "B RUSH ENTERED" and the sound "Hit right" are output overlapping. Therefore, in the transition process to this effect MB, the sound "Hit right" is not output, and at the end time T2 of the ending period, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play are displayed on the display screen G, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. In other words, the display of characters such as "Please hit right" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the video presentation of the effect MB is controlled to start.

<Transition process to production MC>
Next, a case where the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the effect MC, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the effect MC of the fourth mode M4 from the start time T1 of the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the "most favorable result". Here, in the effect MC, the duration of the intro part of the music used in the effect MC of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than that of the ending period of the effect C. Therefore, the output of the intro part ends before the end time T2 of the ending period. In addition, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to continuously output the A melody part following the intro part after the output of the intro part of the music ends.

In addition, in the transition process to the performance MC, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the sound "C RUSH ENTERING" during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the output of the sound "C RUSH ENTERING" is controlled to start after sound start time TW3 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and to end the output of the sound "C RUSH ENTERING" simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro portion. Here, the sound start time TW3 is the time obtained by subtracting the output time of the sound "C RUSH ENTERING" from the output period of the intro portion. For example, if the output period of the intro portion is 6 seconds and the output time of the sound "C RUSH ENTERING" is 2 seconds, the sound start time TW3 is 4 seconds. In this case, the sound output of "C RUSH ENTERING" is controlled to start 4 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

In addition, in the performance MC, following the output of the sound "C RUSH has begun", the sound "Please hit right" is output to suggest right-hit play, and the output of the sound "Please hit right" is controlled to end simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end of the ending period T2. In other words, the output time of the sound "Please hit right" is the ending period minus the output period of the intro portion. In addition, in the transition process to the performance MC, at the end of the ending period, in other words at the start of the fourth mode M4, text such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play is displayed on the display screen G, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start.

<Production data>
Next, data used in the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described. The music data and audio data used in each of the fourth mode M4 performances MA to MC are stored as sequence data, parameter data, and sound data in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 of the sound light emission control device 90, respectively, as described in FIG. 23. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C used in each of the performances MA to MC, and the common ROM 96 stores sound data corresponding to the music data A to C used in each of the performances MA to MC. The MPU 92 then controls the sound output LSI 95 to read the sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C from the ROM 93 and the sound data from the common ROM 96 as necessary, and output them from the speaker unit 24. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the read music data A to C are set in register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the music data A to C are output (played) from the speaker unit 24.

Here, music data A is associated with performance MA, music data B is associated with performance MB, and music data C is associated with performance MC according to the data table stored in ROM 93. Therefore, when the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process in FIG. 31 is performance MA, MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data A from ROM 93 and common ROM 96, sets them in register 952 of sound output LSI 95, and controls sound output LSI 95 so that music data A is output (played) from speaker unit 24. Also, when the type of performance set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process of FIG. 31 is performance MB, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data B from the ROM 93 and common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that music data B is output (played) from the speaker unit 24. Also, when the type of performance set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process of FIG. 31 is performance MC, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data C from the ROM 93 and common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that music data C is output (played) from the speaker unit 24.

Each of the music data A to C is made up of multiple sections, such as an intro section (prelude), an A-melody section (the first melody of the song), a B-melody section (the melody following the A-melody), a hook section (chorus), an interlude, and an outro (postlude). Examples of general music configurations are shown below. Note that the following examples A and B are merely examples, and the music configurations used in the first embodiment are not limited to the examples shown below.
Example A) Intro → Verse A → Verse B → Chorus → Interlude → Verse A → Verse B → Chorus → Interlude → Verse C → Chorus → Outro Example B) Intro → Verse A → Verse B → Chorus → Interlude → Verse B → Chorus → Verse C → Outro

The common ROM 96 and ROM 93 store the audio data A to E and the audio start times TW1 to TW3 described with reference to FIG. 33, respectively. Here, the audio data A to C correspond to the audio start times TW1 to TW3. The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read the audio data stored in the common ROM 96 as necessary and output it from the speaker unit 24. Here, the audio data A is "Enter A RUSH", the audio data B is "Enter B RUSH", the audio data C is "Enter C RUSH", the audio data D is "Hit right", and the audio data E is "Please hit right".

The ROM 93 also stores a time TE corresponding to the ending period described with reference to FIG. 33. When determining whether the ending period has ended, the MPU 92 refers to the time TE corresponding to the ending period stored in the ROM 93.

Also, according to the data table stored in the ROM 93, the audio data A is associated with the performance MA, the audio data B is associated with the performance MB, and the audio data C is associated with the performance MC. Also, the audio data D is associated with the performance MA, and the audio data E is associated with the performance MC. Therefore, when the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process in FIG. 31 is the performance MA, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read the audio data A and the audio data D and output them from the speaker unit 24. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data A and the audio data D are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and control the sound output LSI 95 to output (play) the audio data A and the audio data D from the speaker unit 24.
31 is effect MB, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read out the audio data B and output it from the speaker unit 24. More specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and audio data corresponding to the audio data B from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 to output (play) the audio data B from the speaker unit 24.
31 is the MC effect, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read out the audio data C and audio data E and output them from the speaker unit 24. More specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and audio data corresponding to the audio data C and audio data E from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 to output (play) the audio data C and audio data E from the speaker unit 24.

The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read sound data corresponding to the sound data A to C from the common ROM 96 based on the sound start times TW1 to TW3 and output the sound from the speaker unit 24. Specifically, when outputting sound data A, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data A from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 after the sound start time TW1 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 33) and output the sound from the speaker unit 24. When outputting sound data B, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data B from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 after the sound start time TW2 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 33) and output the sound from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, when outputting audio data C, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data C from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 after the audio start time TW3 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 33), and output them from the speaker unit 24.

In addition, the video data used for each performance in the fourth mode M4 is stored in the performance data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 103 of the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Specifically, video data A to D are stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Following instructions from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 reads out the video data stored in the performance data storage area 1032 and instructs the VDP 52 to display it on the display screen G.

Here, the data table associates video data A with performance MA, video data B with performance MB, and video data C with performance MC. Therefore, if the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process of FIG. 31 is performance MA, the MPU 102 reads out video data A and instructs the VDP 52 to display it on the display screen G. Also, if the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process of FIG. 31 is performance MB, the MPU 102 reads out video data B and instructs the VDP 52 to display it on the display screen G. Also, if the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process of FIG. 31 is performance MC, the MPU 102 reads out video data C and instructs the VDP 52 to display it on the display screen G.

The video data D is image data for right-hit navigation for RUSH. When performing right-hit navigation for RUSH, the MPU 102 reads out the video data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and instructs the VDP 52 to display it on the display screen G. Note that the video data D for right-hit navigation for RUSH may be stored in the character ROM 106, and when performing right-hit navigation for RUSH, the MPU 102 may instruct the VDP 52 to read out the video data D from the character ROM 106 and display it on the display screen G.

<Transition process to fourth mode (RUSH mode)>
Next, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 34 to Fig. 37. Fig. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode). Here, the operation of the sound and light emission control device 90 in the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) described with reference to Fig. 33 will be described. In this transition process of the rendering mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S1701 to S1706 as shown in Fig. 34.

In step S1701, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 92 checks whether an ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1701 that an ending command has been received (YES), then in step S1702, the MPU 92 determines the type of presentation for the fourth mode M4. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines the type of presentation for the fourth mode M4 based on the type of flag set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S1506 or step S1508 of FIG. 31. Also, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1701 that an ending command has not been received (NO), then the presentation type selection process ends.

If the result of the determination in step S1702 is performance MA, the MPU 92 executes transition processing to performance MA in step S1703. The transition processing to performance MA in step S1703 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. If the result of the determination in step S1702 is performance MB, the MPU 92 executes transition processing to performance MB in step S1704. The transition processing to performance MB in step S1704 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. If the result of the determination in step S1702 is performance MC, the MPU 92 executes transition processing to performance MC in step S1705. The transition processing to performance MC in step S1705 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

In step S1706, the MPU 92 clears the flags set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S1506 or step S1508 of FIG. 31.

<Transition process to performance MA>
Next, the transition process to the effect MA in step S1703 in Fig. 34 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MA is set. In this transition process to the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801 to S1808 as shown in Fig. 35.

In step S1801, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S1804 described below. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the audio start time TW1 is set as the measurement time. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and TW1 is set to "2 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW1. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1802, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S1806, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 references the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1803, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for performance MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data A for performance MA from the ROM 93 and common ROM 96, sets them in register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that music data A is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the intro part of music data A from the speaker unit 24.

In step S1804, the MPU 92 determines whether the audio start time TW1 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S1801. If the MPU 92 determines that the audio start time TW1 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 starts outputting audio for the performance MA in step S1805. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data A for the performance MA "A RUSH ENTERING" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the audio data A is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the audio data A "A RUSH ENTERING" from the speaker unit 24. Also, if the MPU 92 determines that the audio start time TW1 has not elapsed in step S1804 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition process to the performance MA.

In step S1806, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the timer counter value set in step S1802. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts the right-hit navigation for RUSH in step S1807. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D "Right hit" for the performance MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data D is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts the output (playback) of the sound data D "Right hit" from the speaker unit 24, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH is started. Also, if the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has not elapsed in step S1806 (NO), it ends the transition process to the performance MA.

In step S1808, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video presentation of the performance MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play the video data A stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data A from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

The time measurement configuration for steps S1804 and S1806 is arbitrary, and may be performed using a real-time clock (RTC), for example.

<Transition process to production MB>
Next, the transition process to the effect MB in step S1704 in Fig. 34 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MB is set. In this transition process to the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S1901 to S1908 as shown in Fig. 36.

In step S1901, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S1904 described below. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the audio start time TW2 is set as the measurement time. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and TW2 is set to "3 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "1500" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW2. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1902, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S1906, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 references the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time a timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1903, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the performance MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data B for the performance MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that music data B is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the intro part of music data B from the speaker unit 24.

In step S1904, the MPU 92 determines whether the audio start time TW2 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S1901. If the MPU 92 determines that the audio start time TW2 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 starts outputting audio for the performance MB in step S1905. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data B "B RUSH ENTER" for the performance MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the audio data B is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the audio data B "B RUSH ENTER" from the speaker unit 24. Also, if the MPU 92 determines that the audio start time TW2 has not elapsed in step S1904 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition process to the performance MB.

In step S1906, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S1902. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts the hitting method navigation in step S1907. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to read the video data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G, and the right-hand hitting navigation for RUSH is started. Also, if the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has not elapsed in step S1906 (NO), it ends the transition process to the performance MB.

In step S1908, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video presentation of the presentation MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play video data B stored in the presentation data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads video data B from the presentation data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

The time measurement configuration for steps S1904 and S1906 is arbitrary, and may be performed using a real-time clock (RTC), for example.

<Transition process to production MC>
Next, the transition process to the performance MC in step S1705 in Fig. 34 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the performance MC is set. In this transition process to the performance MC, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2008 as shown in Fig. 37.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S2004 described below. Specifically, it references the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to the audio start time TW3 as the measurement time. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and TW3 is set to "1 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "500" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW3. The value set in this timer counter is updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed by subtracting 1 from the previous value.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S2006, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 references the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time a timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2003, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the performance MC. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C for the performance MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data C is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the intro part of the music data C from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2004, the MPU 92 determines whether the audio start time TW3 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the timer counter value set in step S2001. If the MPU 92 determines that the audio start time TW3 has elapsed (YES), it starts outputting audio for the performance MC in step S2005. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data C "C RUSH ENTER" for the performance MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the audio data C is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the audio data C "C RUSH ENTER" from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, after outputting the sound data C "C RUSH ENTER" for the performance MC, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data E "Please hit right" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data E is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the sound data E "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24. Note that the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so that after outputting the sound data C "C RUSH ENTER", the sound data E "Please hit right" is output. Therefore, after the sound "C RUSH ENTER" is output from the speaker unit 24, the sound "Please hit right" is output. Furthermore, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2004 that the audio start time TW3 has not elapsed (NO), it ends the transition process to the performance MC.

In step S2006, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2002. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts the hitting method navigation in step S2007. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to read the video data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G, and the right-hand hitting navigation for RUSH is started. Also, if the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has not elapsed in step S2006 (NO), it ends the transition process to the performance MC.

In step S2008, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video presentation of the presentation MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play the video data C stored in the presentation data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data C from the presentation data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S2004 and S2006 is arbitrary, and may be, for example, measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In the first embodiment, the transition process between effects MA to MC was described assuming that there are three types of effects in the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode), namely effects MA, MB, and MC. However, the types of effects in the fourth mode M4 are not limited to the above three types, and may be any type, and may be two types, or four or more types.

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the transition means (MPU 62) transitions the game state from the jackpot game (first game state) to the RUSH mode (second game state), the playback means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) controls so that music data (BGM) of the RUSH mode (second game state) is played during the jackpot game. Specifically, at the start of the ending period of the performance C, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music of the fourth mode M4. Therefore, when the game state transitions to a different state, the game state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flow. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the playback means plays music data for RUSH mode (second game state) at the start of the ending period of presentation C, so there is no sense of incongruity when music playback begins from the ending period of presentation C, and transitions between game states can be made more smoothly without interrupting the flow of play.

(3) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) issues a first notification (audio output of RUSH entry) that enables the player to recognize the RUSH mode to which the player will transition after hitting a jackpot, so that the player can recognize that the game state to which the player will transition after hitting a jackpot is RUSH mode. This can increase the player's attention to the game and improve the player's sense of anticipation for the game.

(4) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first notification control means ends the first notification (audio output of RUSH entry) when the intro section of the music finishes playing, so that the end of the first notification coincides with the end of the intro section of the music, providing a sense of unity and exhilaration. In addition, because the notification is made by audio, it can be reliably notified even to players who have taken their eyes off the gaming machine.

(5) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first notification control means controls the first notification to start during the ending period of the jackpot game. Specifically, during the ending period, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the sound "Entering XX RUSH". This allows the player to recognize the game content of the RUSH mode to which the player transitions after the jackpot game. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be increased, and the player's sense of anticipation for the game can be improved.

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the music data (BGM) and audio data for the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are stored separately in the common ROM 96 of the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio data A to C of "Enter A RUSH", "Enter B RUSH", and "Enter C RUSH" are read out and output separately from the music data (BGM) A to C used in the effects MA to MC. However, as described with reference to FIG. 33, the audio of "Enter A RUSH", "Enter B RUSH", and "Enter C RUSH" is output during the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effects MA to MC. For this reason, the audio of "Enter A RUSH", "Enter B RUSH", and "Enter C RUSH" may be included in the intro portion of the music data A to C. In this second embodiment, a second embodiment will be described in which the intro parts of music data A to C include the sounds "A RUSH ENTERING", "B RUSH ENTERING", and "C RUSH ENTERING", respectively. Below, a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be given the same reference numerals and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

<Production data>
38 is a diagram showing music data stored in the common ROM 96. In the second embodiment, as described above, the intro portion of each of the music data A to C includes audio data for "enter A RUSH", "enter B RUSH", and "enter C RUSH". If audio such as "hit right" is included in the intro portion of the music, when the music playback ends and returns to the beginning to resume output, that is, a so-called loop process is performed, the audio such as "hit right" will be output during the loop (when playing for the second or subsequent times). For this reason, in the second embodiment, it is preferable not to include the intro portion in the loop process.

In this second embodiment, as shown in Figure 38, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data used in each of the performances MA to MC are divided into an intro portion and other loop portions and stored in ROM 93 and common ROM 96. More specifically, music data A to C are each divided into sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data only for the intro portion, including audio data such as "Please hit right," and sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data from the A melody portion onwards, excluding the intro portion, and stored in ROM 93 and common ROM 96.

For example, when looping music data A used in performance MA, the MPU 92 plays the intro music data the first time the music is output, then plays the loop music data, and when the loop music data ends, it outputs the loop music data again (hereinafter also referred to as loop processing). Note that by performing the same processing as above for music data B and C used in performance MB and MC, it is possible to prevent sounds such as "Please hit right" from being output the second time onwards (during loop processing).

The audio for "Entering A RUSH" included in the intro section of music data A is set to end at the same time or approximately the same time as the output of the intro section of music data A ends. The audio for "Entering B RUSH" included in the intro section of music data B is set to end at the same time or approximately the same time as the output of the intro section of music data B ends. The audio for "Entering C RUSH" included in the intro section of music data C is set to end at the same time or approximately the same time as the output of the intro section of music data C ends.

Also, according to the data table stored in the ROM 93, music data A is associated with performance MA, music data B is associated with performance MB, and music data C is associated with performance MC. Therefore, when the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process of FIG. 31 is performance MA, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read music data A and output it from the speaker unit 24. When the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process of FIG. 31 is performance MB, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read music data B and output it from the speaker unit 24. When the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process of FIG. 31 is performance MC, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read music data C and output it from the speaker unit 24. More specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 based on the program and processing data stored in the ROM 93, and sets the data in a register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 outputs (plays) music data A to C from the speaker unit 24 based on the data set in the register 952.

Furthermore, the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 store sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D and E. The MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 as necessary, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data D and E are output (played) from the speaker unit 24. Here, the sound data D is a digitalized version of the sound "Hit right" and the sound data E is a digitalized version of the sound "Please hit right". Here, the sound data D is associated with the performance MA, and the sound data E is associated with the performance MC. For this reason, when the performance type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process in FIG. 31 is performance MA, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read out the sound data D and output it from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, if the type of performance set in step S1506 or S1508 of the performance type selection process in FIG. 31 is a performance MC, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read out the audio data E and output it from the speaker unit 24.

<Transition process to performance MA>
Next, the transition process to the effect MA in the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the effect MA in the second embodiment. In this transition process to the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2106 as shown in Fig. 39.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S2103 described below. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2102, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data A from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that music data A is output from the speaker unit 24. This causes the speaker unit 24 to start outputting (playing) the intro part of music data A. The intro part of music data A also contains audio data for "A RUSH ENTERING". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW1) has elapsed since the start of output of the intro part of music data A, the audio "A RUSH ENTERING" is output (played) from the speaker unit 24 in time with the intro part of music data A.

In step S2103, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2101. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2103 that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts the RUSH right-hit navigation in step S2104. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D "Hit right" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data D is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts the output (playback) of the sound data D "Hit right" from the speaker unit 24. If the MPU 92 does not determine in step S2103 that the ending period has ended (NO), it ends the transition process.

In step S2105, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video presentation of the performance MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play the video data A stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data A from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

In step S2106, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of music data A has ended, and if the output of music data A has ended, it reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the loop portion of music data A (excluding the intro portion) from ROM 93 and common ROM 96, sets them in register 952 of sound output LSI 95, and controls sound output LSI 95 so that the loop portion of music data A is output (played) from speaker unit 24. Furthermore, if the output of music data A has not ended, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of music data A.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2103 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MB>
Next, the transition process to the performance MB in the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the performance MB in the second embodiment. In this transition process to the performance MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2206 as shown in Fig. 40.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S2203 described below. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2202, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to music data B from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that music data B is output from the speaker unit 24. This causes the speaker unit 24 to start outputting (playing) the intro part of music data B. The intro part of music data B also contains audio data for "B RUSH ENTERING". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW2) has elapsed since the start of output of the intro part of music data B, the audio "B RUSH ENTERING" is output (played) from the speaker unit 24 in time with the intro part of music data B.

In step S2203, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2201. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the right-hand hitting navigation for RUSH in step S2204. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to read the video data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G, and the right-hand hitting navigation for RUSH is started. If the MPU 92 does not determine in step S2203 that the ending period has ended (NO), the transition process ends.

In step S2205, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video presentation of the presentation MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play video data B stored in the presentation data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads video data B from the presentation data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

In step S2206, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of music data B has ended, and if the output of music data B has ended, it reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the loop portion of music data B (excluding the intro portion) from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the loop portion of music data B is output (played) from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, if the output of music data B has not ended, the MPU 92 does not read out the loop portion of music data B.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2203 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MC>
Next, the transition process to the performance MC in the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the performance MC in the second embodiment. In this transition process to the performance MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2306 as shown in Fig. 41.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S2303 described below. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2302, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data C is output from the speaker unit 24. This causes the speaker unit 24 to start outputting (playing) the intro part of the music data C. The intro part of the music data C also contains the audio data "C RUSH ENTERING" and "Please hit right". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW3) has elapsed since the start of outputting the intro part of the music data C, the audio "C RUSH ENTERING" is output from the speaker unit 24 in time with the intro part of the music data C, and after the audio "C RUSH ENTERING" is output, the audio "Please hit right" is output (played).

In step S2303, the MPU 92 judges whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2301. If the MPU 92 judges that the ending period has ended in step S2303 (YES), the MPU 92 starts the hitting method navigation in step S2304. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to read the video data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G, and the right hitting navigation for RUSH is started. If the MPU 92 does not judge that the ending period has ended in step S2303 (NO), the transition process is terminated.

In step S2305, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video presentation of the performance MC. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play the video data C stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data C from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

In step S2306, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the music data C has ended, and if the output of the music data C has ended, it reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the loop portion of the music data C (excluding the intro portion) from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the loop portion of the music data C is output (played) from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, if the output of the music data C has not ended, the MPU 92 does not read out the loop portion of the music data C.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2303 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the intro parts of the music data (BGM) A to C include the sounds "A RUSH ENTER", "B RUSH ENTER", and "C RUSH ENTER", respectively. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the music data and the sound data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) separately in the storage means (ROM 93 and common ROM 96), and it is also not necessary to measure time to output the sounds "A RUSH ENTER", "B RUSH ENTER", and "C RUSH ENTER". Therefore, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the storage means (ROM 93 and common ROM 96). In addition, it is possible to reduce the calculation processing of the MPU 92. In addition, the sounds "A RUSH ENTER", "B RUSH ENTER", and "C RUSH ENTER" included in the first data allow the player to recognize the game state. This can increase the player's attention to the game and improve the player's sense of expectation for the game. In addition, the data of the intro section including the sound data of "A RUSH ENTERING", "B RUSH ENTERING", and "C RUSH ENTERING" is not repeatedly played, and the data from the A melody onwards excluding the intro section is repeatedly played, so the player does not feel annoyed by the sound of "A RUSH ENTERING", "B RUSH ENTERING", and "C RUSH ENTERING" being repeatedly played. Other effects are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the first and second embodiments, the transition process between effects MA to MC was described assuming that there are three types of effects in the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode), namely, effects MA, MB, and MC. However, the types of effects in the fourth mode M4 are not limited to the above three types, and may be any type, and may be two types or four or more types.

In addition, in the above first and second embodiments, an introductory part of music is played when transitioning to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is described, but the application of the present invention is not limited to transitions to the fourth mode M4, and can be applied to all mode transitions that involve a change in music.

[Third embodiment]
The first and second embodiments are embodiments in which an MPU 92, a sound output LSI 95, and a common ROM 96 are mounted on the sound and light emission control board 91 of the sound and light emission control device 90. In the first and second embodiments, the MPU 92 has a function of determining the content of the performance for a predetermined period based on a command received from the main control device 60, and performing light emission control on various lamp units according to the content. The MPU 92 also issues sound output instructions to the sound output LSI 95 in accordance with the determined content of the performance, and causes the sound output LSI 95 to control the output of sound from the speaker unit 24.

In this third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, an embodiment will be described in which a sound/light SOC (System On a Chip) 97 and a sound/light ROM 98 are provided on the sound/light control board 91. The sound/light SOC 97 includes a control core 971 that determines the content of the performance according to a command received from the main control device and controls the light emission of the display lamp device 23 according to the determined performance content, a sound output core 972 that controls the sound output of the speaker unit 24 according to the performance content determined by the control core 971, and a memory controller 974 that reads data from the sound/light ROM 98 according to address data transmitted from a data transfer unit (DMA: Direct Memory Access) 971c of the control core 971 and address data transmitted from a data transfer unit 972c of the sound output core 972. In this case, the sound output core 972 is given priority over the control core 971 when reading data.

<Electrical configuration related to performance execution control>
The electrical configuration for controlling the execution of the effects of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of Fig. 42. Note that the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals and will not be described again.

The device is equipped with an audio/light emission control device 90 as a control device for controlling the execution of the performance based on instructions from the main control device 60. As shown in FIG. 42, the audio/light emission control device 90 is equipped with an audio/light emission control board 91 equipped with an audio/light SOC 97, an audio/light ROM 98, and an amplifier circuit 99. The audio/light SOC 97 is equipped with a control core 971, an audio output core 972, an audio data processing unit 973, and a memory controller 974, and the audio/light SOC 97 is configured by integrating each of these elements into a single chip.

The control core 971 determines the specific content of the performance based on the command received from the main control device 60, and executes the light emission control of the display lamp device 23 according to the determined content. The control core 971 also sets data according to the determined content of the performance in the register 972a provided in the sound output core 972, and transmits a command according to the determined content of the performance to the display control device 100. As a result, the sound output core 972 executes sound output control in a manner according to the content instructed by the control core 971, and the display control device 100 executes display control in a manner according to the content instructed by the control core 971. Incidentally, the data setting in the register 972a of the sound output core 972 by the control core 971 is performed through the data bus SL that electrically connects the control core 971 and the sound output core 972 in the sound/light SOC 97. Note that bidirectional communication is possible between the control core 971 and the sound output core 972 via the data bus SL, and data is set from the control core 971 to the sound output core 972 as described above, and a signal indicating that sound output is being performed is sent from the sound output core 972 to the control core 971.

In addition to the CPU 971a, which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, the control core 971 also includes a RAM 971b, which is used when reading out program data and control data previously stored in the sound and light ROM 98, and which temporarily stores data required for executing the program. The RAM 971b is configured to use a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM or DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is randomly accessible and has a faster time to read data than the sound and light ROM 98 when compared with the same data capacity. The data capacity of the RAM 971b has a data capacity of many bytes so that multiple data can be stored and retained simultaneously, and has a data capacity in kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound and light ROM 98. However, the data capacity of the RAM 971b is not limited to this, and can be any as long as it is possible to execute control suitably in the control core 971.

The control core 971 also includes a data transfer unit 971c that issues data read instructions to the memory controller 974 from the sound/light ROM 98 based on instructions from the CPU 971a. When data corresponding to a data read instruction is written by the CPU 971a to an internal register of the data transfer unit 971c, the data transfer unit 971c transmits address data for a data read instruction to the memory controller 974 until all of the data corresponding to the read instruction is read to the RAM 971b. This address data is transmitted in synchronization with a clock signal (e.g., 4 MHz) that is periodically transmitted from a clock circuit built into the data transfer unit 971c.

The sound output core 972 executes sound output control of the speaker unit 24 according to the content of the performance determined by the control core 971. The sound output core 972 includes a register 972a, a HWD 972b, an SCM 972d, and a data transfer unit 972c.

The register 972a has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used by the sound output core 972, and is configured to use the memory, which requires an external power supply to store the data, as both a read and write memory. In addition, the register 972a is randomly accessible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound and light ROM 98. The register 972a has a data capacity of many bytes so that it can store and hold multiple data simultaneously, and has a data capacity in kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound and light ROM 98 and is smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 971b of the control core 971. However, the data capacity of the register 972a is not limited to this, and can be any capacity as long as it is possible to execute control appropriately in the sound output core 972.

The HWD 972b and the SCM 972d have a function of creating digital musical sound data using sound data read from the sound/light ROM 98 according to the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the control core 971 and stored in the register 972a. The sequence data includes time data indicating the start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, and tone of the sound at a specific timing. These sequence data and parameter data are set as a set of mutually corresponding data, and a series of sounds can be output by using this set of sequence data and parameter data. In addition, the period of sound output determined by a set of sequence data and parameter data is a specific time that is constant regardless of the type of sequence data and parameter data, and is, for example, 2.1 sec, which is shorter than one game round or one open/close execution mode. However, this is not limited to this, and may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. It may also be configured as a series of melodies, in which case the period of sound output determined by the sequence data and parameter data will vary depending on the type of data.

HWD972b creates digital musical sound data to play back pre-sampled recording data, and enables playback of the recording data by creating sine wave data using recording data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound-light ROM98. The recording data may be compressed data such as MP3, or uncompressed data. SCM972d does not create digital musical sound data from a predetermined amount of recording data, but creates digital musical sound data by combining square wave data pre-stored in the sound-light ROM98 in a time series, thereby enabling playback of electronic sounds (so-called beep-beep sounds).

The configuration of the register 972a used to create digital musical sound data in the HWD 972b and SCM 972d will now be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 43. The register 972a is provided with a sequence area 111, a parameter area 112, an HWD area 113, and an SCM area 114. The sequence data already described is written in the sequence area 111, and the parameter data already described is written in the parameter area 112.

By referencing the sequence data written in the sequence area 111 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 112, the HWD 972b reads the recording data stored in the sound/light ROM 98 into the HWD area 113 and creates digital musical sound data from the recording data, enabling the output of recorded sounds. The HWD area 113 is provided with areas for the 1st CH 113a to the 16th CH 113p, and it is possible to create digital musical sound data based on different recording data in each of the CH areas 113a to 113p. This makes it possible to simultaneously output sounds corresponding to multiple different recording data.

By referencing the sequence data written in the sequence area 111 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 112, the SCM 972d reads the square wave data stored in the sound/light ROM 98 into the SCM area 114, and creates digital musical sound data from the square wave data, enabling the output of electronic sounds. The SCM area 114 is provided with a 1st CH area 114a to a 16th CH area 114p, and different digital musical sound data can be created in each of the CH areas 114a to 114p. This makes it possible to output multiple different electronic sounds simultaneously.

The 1st CH area 113a to the 16th CH area 113p in the HWD area 113 and the 1st CH area 114a to the 16th CH area 114p in the SCM area 114 each have an area capable of storing two pieces of created digital musical sound data, and while sound output control is being performed using the digital musical sound data created in one of the storable areas, digital musical sound data corresponding to the next execution period for the execution period of that sound output control is created in the other storable area. This makes it possible to create the digital musical sound data required for the next execution period of the sound output control in parallel while sound is being output, making it possible to output sound continuously.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 42, the sound data processing unit 973 of the sound/light SOC 97 has a function as a digital/analog converter, and converts the digital musical sound data created in the HWD area 113 of the register 972a and the digital musical sound data created in the SCM area 114 into an analog sound signal, which is output to the amplifier circuit 99 formed on the display control board 101. The amplifier circuit 99 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the amplified sound signal to the speaker unit 24. This causes a predetermined sound to be output from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, when digital musical sound data is created simultaneously in multiple CH areas 113a-143p in the HWD area 113, the sound data processing unit 973 synthesizes the digital musical sound data, and when digital musical sound data is created simultaneously in multiple CH areas 114a-144p in the SCM area 114, it synthesizes the digital musical sound data. Furthermore, if digital musical sound data has been created in both the HWD area 113 and the SCM area 114, the digital musical sound data is synthesized. When synthesis is performed in this manner, the resulting digitally synthesized musical sound data is converted into an analog sound signal, and as already explained, is amplified by the amplifier circuit 99 and then output to the speaker unit 24. This makes it possible to output multiple different sounds from the speaker unit 24 simultaneously.

As described above, when sound is output, sound data, which is either recording data or square wave data, is read from the sound/light ROM 98 to the register 972a, and the sound data is read by the data transfer unit 972c of the sound output core 972 based on the sequence data stored in the sequence area 111 of the register 972a.

To explain this in more detail using the explanatory diagram of Figure 44 showing an example of sequence data, the sequence data SD defines pointer data set in correspondence with the processing timing of the sound output core 972, and defines sound output content data and data transfer content data in correspondence with each pointer data. The processing timing of the sound output core 972 occurs in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from a clock circuit (not shown) built into the sound output core 972. In this case, the period of the clock signal is shorter than the period of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 972c, specifically 10 MHz. When it is time to process the sound output core 972, the HWD 972b, SCM 972d, and data transfer unit 972c each perform an operation corresponding to the sequence data and parameter data.

The sound output content data in the sequence data SD is used to create digital musical sound data for each channel in HWD972b and SCM972d. In this case, the sound output content data is set in correspondence with the pointer data, and the creation of digital musical sound data based on the sound output content data set in correspondence with each pointer data is performed using the sound data transferred in advance to register 972a.

The data transfer content data in the sequence data SD is used to specify the timing of reading data from the sound/light ROM 98 in the data transfer unit 972c, and is also used to specify the address data of the area of the sound/light ROM 98 in which the data to be read is stored. The data transfer content data includes data for a data read instruction so that there are a plurality of predetermined pointer data between the timing of reading sound data corresponding to one channel and the timing of reading sound data corresponding to the next channel. The data for one data read instruction includes data for reading sound data of a data amount that enables sound output for a predetermined time, and the sound data corresponds to one channel for either the HWD 972b or the SCM 972d. Therefore, when multiple digital musical sound data are synthesized and sound is output, a data read instruction is issued for the number of digital musical sound data. In addition, the sound data read based on one data read instruction corresponds to data that enables sound output for the predetermined time of 700 μsec in the corresponding channel. In this case, HWD 972b and SCM 972d each have 16 channels, and the time required to read out 700 μsec of sound data for all 16 channels is less than 700 μsec. This makes it possible to create digital musical sound data that allows sound to be output for a specific time while sound is being output for the next specific time that follows that specific time.

The data transfer unit 971c of the control core 971 and the data transfer unit 972c of the sound output core 972 each read data from a common sound/light ROM 98. The sound/light ROM 98 is configured to use a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) for read-only use. Specifically, a NOR type flash memory is used as the sound/light ROM 98, but a NAND type flash memory may also be used. The sound/light ROM 98 stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processes corresponding to those programs.

The data structure of the sound and light ROM 98 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 45. The sound and light ROM 98 stores program data (1), program data (2), ..., program data (L) for executing processing for performance control by the CPU 971a of the control core 971. By using these program data, the CPU 971a executes main processing and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The sound and light ROM 98 also stores processing data (1), processing data (2), ..., processing data (M) in advance. These processing data include data tables used to execute each performance, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output core 972. The sound and light ROM 98 also stores command data (1), command data (2), ..., command data (N) in advance. These command data are used by the CPU 971a of the control core 971 to instruct the display control device 100 on the performance content.

In addition to the data used to execute processing by the CPU 971a of the control core 971 as described above, the sound and light ROM 98 stores light emission data (1), light emission data (2), ..., light emission data (P), as well as sound data (1), sound data (2), ..., sound data (Q). Each light emission data is set with information on the type of light-emitting section to be turned on in the display lamp device 23 during a specified performance period, the lighting period, and the lighting sequence, and the contents of these light emission patterns differ depending on the type of light emission data. Each light emission data stored in the sound and light ROM 98 has a different period of light emission control to which it is subject, and different light emission pattern contents. Furthermore, each sound data includes recording data consisting of a sine wave, as well as square wave data used to output electronic sounds.

As shown in FIG. 42, the sound/light ROM 98 is electrically connected to the memory controller 974 of the sound/light SOC 97 via an address bus SL1 and a data bus SL2. The memory controller 974 is electrically connected to the control core 971 via an address bus SL3 and a data bus SL4, and is electrically connected to the sound output core 972 via an address bus SL5 and a data bus SL6.

The memory controller 974 receives address data for which a read command is issued from the data transfer unit 971c of the control core 971 via the address bus SL3. The memory controller 974 is equipped with a control-side address buffer 974a for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 971c. When new address data is received from the data transfer unit 971c in a situation where no unprocessed address data is stored, the address data is stored in the control-side address buffer 974a. At this time, a normal acceptance signal indicating that the address data has been normally accepted is sent from the memory controller 974 to the data transfer unit 971c via the data bus SL4, and this identifies that the address data has been normally accepted in the data transfer unit 971c. On the other hand, when new address data is received from the data transfer unit 971c in a situation where unprocessed address data is stored in the control-side address buffer 974a, the address data is not stored in the control-side address buffer 974a. In this case, since the normal acceptance signal is not sent to the data transfer unit 971c, it is identified that the same address data needs to be sent again in the data transfer unit 971c.

If it corresponds to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 971c, the memory controller 974 transmits the address data via the address bus SL1 to the sound/light ROM 98, and receives data corresponding to that address data from the sound/light ROM 98 via the data bus SL2. Then, it transmits the received data via the data bus SL4 to the RAM 971b of the control core 971 or the internal register of the CPU 971a.

The address data of the read instruction target is transmitted to the memory controller 974 from the data transfer unit 972c of the sound output core 972 via the address bus SL5. The memory controller 974 is equipped with a sound output side address buffer 974b to store the address data received from the data transfer unit 972c, and when new address data is received from the data transfer unit 972c in a situation where unprocessed address data is not stored, the address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 974 to the data transfer unit 972c via the data bus SL6, thereby specifying that the address data has been normally received in the data transfer unit 972c. On the other hand, when new address data is received from the data transfer unit 972c in a situation where unprocessed address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b, the address data is not stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b. In this case, a normal acceptance signal is not sent to the data transfer unit 972c, so the data transfer unit 972c determines that the same address data needs to be sent again.

If it corresponds to the address data sent from the data transfer unit 972c, the memory controller 974 sends the address data to the sound/light ROM 98 via the address bus SL1, and receives data corresponding to the address data from the sound/light ROM 98 via the data bus SL2. Then, it sends the received data to the register 972a of the sound output core 972 via the data bus SL6.

The memory controller 974 has a built-in clock circuit, and processing in the memory controller 974 is performed in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit. In this case, the period of the clock signal is shorter than the period of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 972c and the period of the clock signal of the sound output core 972, and is specifically 15 MHz.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above first to third embodiments, the case where the ending period of the jackpot game is fixed is described. In this fourth embodiment, an embodiment is described in which the ending period that takes place after all rounds of the jackpot game are completed changes depending on the type of jackpot, specifically, the type (type) of special symbols and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low probability mode). The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments are given the same reference numerals and overlapping descriptions are omitted.

Figure 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the pachinko machine 10 large prize opening opening and closing process of the fourth embodiment. In the large prize opening opening and closing process of the fourth embodiment, the MPU 62 executes steps S2401 to S2419 as shown in Figure 46. In step S2401, the MPU 62 determines whether the large prize opening 381 is open or not. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2401 that the large prize opening 381 is not open (NO), it executes the process from step S2402A onwards. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S2401 that the large prize opening 381 is open (YES), it executes the process from step S2406 onwards.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2401 that the large prize opening 381 is not open (NO), it determines in step S2402 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0". If the MPU 62 determines in step S2402 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0" (YES), it ends the large prize opening opening/closing process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2402 that at least one of the values of the opening/closing counter SOC and the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), the MPU 62 determines in step S2403 whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0". If the MPU 62 determines in step S2403 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), the MPU 62 ends the large prize opening opening/closing process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2403 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the MPU 62 executes the special prize opening process in step S2404. The special prize opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 19.

In step S2405, the MPU 62 sets an open command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing described above (see FIG. 11), the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S2405 to the sound and light emission control device 90. The MPU 62 then terminates the large prize opening opening and closing processing. Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound and light emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening and closing door 382 has been set to the open state, and executes the specified processing.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2401 that the large prize opening 381 is open (YES), it determines in step S2406 whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", i.e., whether the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S2403 or step S2406 of the large prize opening opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2406 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), then in step S2407 it detects whether or not a prize has been won in the large prize opening 381. The determination of whether or not a prize has been won in the large prize opening 381 is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the large prize opening 381.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2407 that no winning has occurred in the large prize opening 381 (NO), the MPU 62 ends the large prize opening opening opening process. Also, if the MPU 62 determines in step S2407 that a winning has occurred in the large prize opening 381 (YES), the MPU 62 updates the winning counter PC by subtracting 1 from the value in step S2408.

In step S2409, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2409 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 ends the large prize opening opening/closing process. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2409 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process in step S2410. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing door 382 to a closed state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 383.

In step S2411, the MPU 62 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal processing described above (see FIG. 11), the MPU 62 transmits the close command set in step S2411 to the audio and light emission control device 90. Based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, the audio and light emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening and closing door 382 has been set to the closed state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S2412, the MPU 62 determines whether the result is a "special miss result." If the MPU 62 determines in step S2412 that the result is a "special miss result" (YES), it executes the processing from step S2418 onwards, which will be described later.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2412 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" (NO), it executes the processing from step S2413 onwards. In step S2413, the MPU 62 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from it. In step S2414, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2414 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S2415. The MPU 62 then ends the large prize opening/closing process.

The value set in the timer counter T in step S2415 specifies the open waiting time from when the opening/closing door 382 is set to the open state, to when it is set to the closed state again, and then when it is set to the open state again. In the first embodiment, the open waiting time is set to 1 sec, but the open waiting time is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode or the progress status.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2414 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less (YES), it executes the processes in and after step S2416. In step S2416, the MPU 62 performs an ending period setting process. In this ending period setting process, the MPU 62 refers to an ending period determination table, determines an ending period according to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol, and sets a value corresponding to this determined ending period in the timer counter T. Details of the ending period setting process will be described later.

The waiting time for the ending, like the waiting time for the opening, is the same regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be subtly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player recognizes them as the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result that is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result" from a game result that is other than these.

In step S2417, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing described above (see FIG. 11), the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S2417 to the sound and light emission control device 90. The MPU 62 then terminates the large prize opening and closing processing. The sound and light emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening and closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S2406 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S2410 onward as described above. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2412 that the result is a "special miss result" (YES), the MPU 62 updates the value of the open/close counter SOC by subtracting 1 from it in step S2418.

In step S2419, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0". If the MPU 62 determines in step S2419 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S2415 described above. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2419 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S2416 described above.

Figure 47 is a diagram showing a data table of the ending period determination table stored in the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 of the fourth embodiment. More specifically, it is an ending period determination table for determining the ending period after all rounds of play in a big win game are completed. In the fourth embodiment, the ending period is determined according to the type of special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode). For example, as shown in Figure 47, in the case of special symbol 1 (hereinafter also referred to as special symbol 1), if the mode is the high probability mode, the ending period is determined to be "10 sec", and if the mode is the low probability mode, the ending period is determined to be "5 sec". In addition, in the case of special symbol 2 (hereinafter also referred to as special symbol 2), if the mode is the high probability mode, the ending period is determined to be "5 sec", and if the mode is the low probability mode, the ending period is determined to be "2 sec".

In the example shown in FIG. 47, when the special symbols are the same, the ending period is set to be different depending on whether the mode is high probability or low probability, but when the special symbols are the same, the ending period may be set to be the same regardless of whether the mode is high probability or low probability. Also, the ending period shown in FIG. 47 is merely an example, and is not limited to the time shown in FIG. 47 (10 sec, 5 sec, 2 sec), as long as the ending period is different depending on the type (category) of the special symbol and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low probability mode).

48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the setting process of the ending period in the fourth embodiment. The setting process of the ending period will be described below with reference to FIG.
In step S2501, the MPU 62 checks the game state when the big win game is won. Specifically, the game state when the big win game is won is checked based on the contents of the flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 64 (flags corresponding to the type command transmitted from the main control device 60). Next, in step S2502, the MPU 62 judges whether the type of the special symbol in the big win game is special symbol 1 or not. If the type of the special symbol in the big win game is special symbol 1 in step S2502 (YES), in step S2503, the MPU 62 judges whether the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode in step S2503 (YES), in step S2504, the MPU 62 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 47) stored in the ROM 63 and sets the ending period to "10 sec". Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a 2 msec cycle, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 641 of the RAM 64 to “5000”, which corresponds to the ending period of 10 sec.

Also, if the mode is not the high probability mode in step S2503 (NO), in other words, if it is the low probability mode, in step S2505, the MPU 62 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 47) stored in the ROM 63 and sets the ending period to "5 sec." Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed at 2 msec intervals, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 641 of the RAM 64 to "2500," which corresponds to the ending period of 5 sec.

In addition, if the type of the special symbol for the jackpot game is not Special Symbol 1 (NO) in step S2502, in other words if the type of the special symbol for the jackpot game is Special Symbol 2, in step S2506, the MPU 62 determines whether the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode (YES) in step S2506, the MPU 62 sets the ending period to "5 sec" by referring to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 47) stored in the ROM 63 in step S2505. Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed at a 2 msec cycle, the MPU 62 sets "2500", which corresponds to the ending period of 5 sec, to the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 641 of the RAM 64.

Also, if the mode is not the high probability mode in step S2506 (NO), in other words, if it is the low probability mode, in step S2507, the MPU 62 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 47) stored in the ROM 63 and sets the ending period to "2 sec." Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed at 2 msec intervals, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "1000," which corresponds to the ending period of 5 sec.

The value set in the timer counter T in steps S2504, S2505, and S2507 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Note that the configuration for measuring the ending period is arbitrary, and for example, it may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

Figure 49 is a diagram for explaining the timing of RUSH entry and RUSH right-hit navigation in the fourth embodiment. As shown in Figure 49, in the fourth embodiment, the ending period changes depending on the type of special symbol and whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode, so the pachinko machine 10 changes the timing of RUSH entry and RUSH right-hit navigation (suggestion of right-hit play when transitioning to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode)) notification depending on the ending period selected by the MPU 62. Below, the RUSH mode transition process will be described in detail with reference to Figure 49.

<Pattern A>
First, referring to Fig. 49(a), the case where the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TE ≥ (TX + TY)). As shown in Fig. 49(a), when the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY, the RUSH entry notification from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "entering XX RUSH") and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "please hit right") from the speaker unit 24 are controlled to be performed within the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" begins audio start time TW4 after the start time T1 of the ending period, and the audio output of "Please hit right" begins immediately after the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH". Here, audio start time TW4 is a value obtained by subtracting the announcement time (audio output time) TX of entering RUSH and the announcement time (audio output time) TY of the RUSH right hit navigation from the ending period TE, and the audio output of "Please hit right" is controlled to end simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end time T2 of the ending period.

When the ending period TE is the same as the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY, the time of TW4 is 0 sec. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), the music of the RUSH mode to which the game transitions after a big win is controlled to start outputting (playing) from the ending period start time T1. Specifically, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 performance from the start time T1 of the ending period TE. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), the period of the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 performance is shorter than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro part ends before the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Also, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to continuously output the A melody part following the intro part after the output of the intro part of the music ends.

In addition, in the transition process shown in FIG. 49(a), the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the sound "enter RUSH" during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the output of the sound "enter RUSH" is started after the sound start time TW4 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the output of the sound "enter RUSH" is controlled to end simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro portion. In addition, following the output of the sound "enter RUSH", the sound "please hit right" to suggest right-hit play is output, and the output of the sound "please hit right" is controlled to end simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end time T2 of the ending period. For this reason, the game state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of game state flows, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the display screen G may be controlled to display characters such as "please hit right" to suggest right-hit play. In this case, in addition to the audio output of "Please hit right", text such as "Please hit right" is controlled to be displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

<Pattern B>
Next, referring to Figure 49 (b), a case will be described in which the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TE < (TX + TY)), and is longer than the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX (TE ≥ TX). As shown in Figure 49 (b), if the ending period TE is shorter than the time obtained by adding the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY, but is greater than or equal to the RUSH entry notification time TX, the speaker unit 24 will notify you of the entry into the RUSH (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "Entering XX RUSH") within the ending period TE, and the right-hit navigation for the RUSH will notify you (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "Please hit right") after the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" begins audio start time TW5 after the start time T1 of the ending period. Here, audio start time TW5 is a value obtained by subtracting the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX from the ending period TE, and the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" is controlled to end simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end time T2 of the ending period. In addition, after the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH", in other words, simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end time T2 of the ending period, the audio output of "Please hit right" begins.

When the ending period TE is the same as the RUSH entry notification time TX, the time of TW5 is 0 sec. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 49(b), the music of the RUSH mode to which the game transitions after the big win is played is controlled to start outputting (playing) from the ending period start time T1. Specifically, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 performance from the start time T1 of the ending period TE. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 49(b), the ending period TE and the period of the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 performance are the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro part ends at the end time T2 of the ending period. Also, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to continue outputting the A melody part following the intro part after the output of the intro part of the music ends.

In addition, in the transition process shown in FIG. 49(b), the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the sound "Enter RUSH" during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the output of the sound "Enter RUSH" is controlled to start after the sound start time TW5 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the output of the sound "Enter RUSH" is controlled to end simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro portion. In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the sound "Please hit right" is output to suggest a right-hit game, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the sound "Please hit right" is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the video presentation of the presentation MA is controlled to start. This allows the game state to be changed without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of game state flows, improving the interest of the game. Note that at the end time T2 of the ending period, control may be performed so that text such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please hit right", text such as "Please hit right" is controlled to be displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

<Pattern C>
Next, referring to Fig. 49(c), the case where the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TE < (TX + TY)) and shorter than the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX (TE < TX) will be described. As shown in Fig. 49(c), when the ending period TE is shorter than the RUSH entry notification time TX, the notification of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "〇〇 RUSH entry") and the notification of the RUSH right-hit navigation (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "Please hit right") are controlled to be performed after the end time T2 of the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" starts at the end T2 of the ending period TE. In the case shown in FIG. 49(c), the video right-hit navigation for RUSH starts at the end T2 of the ending period TE. If the audio output of "Please hit right" starts immediately after the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH", the right-hit navigation for RUSH will not start even though the player has already entered RUSH mode, which is detrimental to the player. Also, if the audio of "Please hit right" is output at the same time as entering RUSH mode, the audio will overlap with "Entering RUSH". For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 49(c), the audio of "Please hit right" is not output, and the video right-hit navigation for RUSH starts at the end T2 of the ending period TE, and the audio output of "Please hit right" starts after the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH".

In the example shown in FIG. 49(c), the music of the RUSH mode, which is entered after a big win, is controlled to start outputting (playing) from the beginning of the ending period T1. Specifically, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 performance from the beginning of the ending period TE, T1. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 49(c), the duration of the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 performance is longer than the ending period TE. Therefore, the intro part continues to be output even after the end of the ending period TE, T2. The speaker unit 24 is also controlled to continue outputting the A melody part following the intro part after the intro part of the music has finished being output.

In addition, in the transition process shown in FIG. 49(c), the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the sound "Enter RUSH" during the output period of the intro part. As described above, the output of the sound "Enter RUSH" is controlled to start after the sound start time TW6 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and to end the output of the sound "Enter RUSH" simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro part. Here, the sound start time TW6 is the same as the ending period TE. In the example shown in FIG. 49(c), the sound "Enter RUSH" is output from the speaker unit 24 at the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Therefore, when the sound "Please hit right" to suggest a right hit game is output at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, the sound "Enter RUSH" and the sound "Please hit right" are output overlapping each other. Therefore, in the transition process shown in FIG. 49(c), the sound "Please hit right" is not output at the end T2 of the ending period TE, and instead, at the end T2 of the ending period TE, text such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play is displayed on the display screen G, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. In other words, the display of text such as "Please hit right" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). For this reason, the game state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of game state flows, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Figure 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing for transitioning to RUSH mode in the fourth embodiment. The processing for transitioning to RUSH mode in the fourth embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 50. In this processing, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2612 as shown in Figure 50.

In step S2601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 92 checks whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. In step S2601, if the MPU 92 determines that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S2602, the MPU 92 acquires the ending period TE based on the ending command. Note that the ending period TE may be acquired by including information on the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 60, or the ending period determination table shown in FIG. 47 may be stored in the ROM 93 of the sound and light emission control device 90, and the type (type) of the special pattern and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) may be determined from the command type to recognize the ending period TE. In addition, in step S2601, if the MPU 92 does not determine that an ending command has been received (NO), the performance transition process is terminated.

In step S2603, the MPU 92 starts outputting music for the RUSH mode to which the game transitions after a big win. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) for the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the intro part of the music for the RUSH mode from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2604, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE is equal to or greater than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY (TE≧(TX+TY)). If the ending period TE is equal to or greater than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY (YES) in step S2604, in step S2605, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S2609 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 refers to a data table stored in the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to TW4 in the timer counter T. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If, in step S2604, the ending period TE is not equal to or greater than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S2606 whether the ending period TE is equal to or greater than the RUSH entry notification time TX (TE≧TX). If, in step S2606, the ending period TE is equal to or greater than the RUSH entry notification time TX (YES), the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2609, which will be described later, in step S2607. Specifically, the MPU 92 refers to a data table stored in the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to TW5 in the timer counter T. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If, in step S2606, the ending period TE is not longer than the RUSH entry notification time TX (NO), in step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S2609, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 references a data table stored in the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE in the timer counter T. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2609, the MPU 92 determines whether the time set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608 has elapsed, i.e., whether the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. In step S2609, if the time set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance transition process.

Also, if it is determined in step S2609 that the time set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608 has elapsed (YES), in step S2610, the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound data of the RUSH entry. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data of the RUSH entry from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data of the RUSH entry is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the sound of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2611, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry is complete. If the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry is complete in step S2611 (YES), in step S2612, the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound data of the right-hit navigation for the RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data of the right-hit navigation for the RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data of the RUSH entry is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the sound of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24. Also, if the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry is not complete in step S2611 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance transition process.

In addition, in Figures 49 and 50 above, the timing of the notification of "entering RUSH" and "please hit right" is determined based on a comparison of the ending period TE, which is determined depending on whether the type of special symbol and the mode are high probability mode or low probability mode, with the notification time TX for entering RUSH and the notification time TY for the right hit navigation for RUSH. However, the ending period TE, which is determined depending on whether the type of special symbol and the mode are high probability mode or low probability mode, and the notification time TX for entering RUSH and the notification time TY for the right hit navigation for RUSH are known in advance. For this reason, the timing of the notification of "entering RUSH" and "please hit right" may be determined in advance depending on whether the type of special symbol and the mode are high probability mode or low probability mode.

Figure 51 is a diagram showing a data table of the RUSH entry and RUSH right-hit navigation notification timing determination table stored in the ROM 93 of the sound and light emission control device of the fourth embodiment. More specifically, it is a data table for determining the notification timing of the RUSH entry that notifies the player of the RUSH mode to which the player is transferred after a big win game. The notification timing of the RUSH entry is determined by referring to the type of special pattern and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode). For example, in the case of special pattern 1, if the mode is the high probability mode, "TW4" is determined as the notification timing, and if the mode is the low probability mode, "TW5" is determined as the notification timing. Also, in the case of special pattern 2, if the mode is the high probability mode, "TW5" is determined as the notification timing, and if the mode is the low probability mode, "TE" is determined as the notification timing.

Here, "TW4", "TW5" and "TE" are waiting times from the start time T1 of the ending period, and if "TW4" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "entering the RUSH" will start TW4 after the start time T1 of the ending period. Also, if "TW5" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "entering the RUSH" will start TW5 after the start time T1 of the ending period. Furthermore, if "TE" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "entering the RUSH" will start TE after the start time T1 of the ending period, i.e., at the end of the ending period.

Figure 52 is a diagram showing another example of a flowchart of the processing for transitioning to RUSH mode in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, another example of a flowchart of the processing for transitioning to RUSH mode in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 52. In this processing for transitioning to RUSH mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2701 to S2712 as shown in Figure 52.

In step S2701, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 92 checks whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2701 that an ending command has been received (YES), then in step S2702, the MPU 92 acquires information on whether the type and mode of the special symbol for the jackpot game is high probability mode or low probability mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires information on whether the type and mode of the special symbol is high probability mode or low probability mode based on the type command received from the main control device 60. Also, if the MPU 92 does not determine in step S2701 that an ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance transition process.

In step S2703, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the RUSH mode to which the game transitions after a big win. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the intro part of the music for the RUSH mode from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2704, the MPU 92 determines whether the type of special symbol for the jackpot game is special symbol 1 and the mode is high probability mode. If the type of special symbol is special symbol 1 and the mode is high probability mode in step S2704 (YES), the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S2705 to measure the time in step S2709, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 refers to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 51) stored in the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to TW4 in the timer counter T. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the type of the special symbol for the big win game is special symbol 1 and the mode is not high probability mode (NO) in step S2704, the MPU 92 determines in step S2706 whether the type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the mode is low probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the mode is high probability mode. If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the mode is low probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the mode is high probability mode (YES) in step S2706, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2709 described later in step S2707. Specifically, the MPU 92 refers to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 51) stored in the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to TW5 in the timer counter T. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2706, if the type of special symbol is not special symbol 1 and the mode is not the low probability mode, and the type of special symbol is not special symbol 2 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S2708, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S2709 described below. Specifically, the MPU 92 refers to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 51) stored in the ROM 93 and sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE in the timer counter T. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2709, the MPU 92 determines whether the time set in step S2705, step S2707, or step S2708 has elapsed, i.e., whether the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. In step S2709, if the time set in step S2705, step S2707, or step S2708 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance transition process.

Also, if it is determined in step S2709 that the time set in step S2705, step S2707, or step S2708 has elapsed (YES), in step S2710, the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound data of the RUSH entry. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data of the RUSH entry from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data of the RUSH entry is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the sound of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2711, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry is completed. If the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry is completed in step S2711 (YES), in step S2712, the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound data of the right hit navigation for the RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data of the right hit navigation for the RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data of the RUSH entry is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the sound of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24. Also, if the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry is not completed in step S2711 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance transition process.

In the above description, in pattern B of FIG. 49(b), if the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TE<(TX+TY)), and is equal to or longer than the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX (TE≧TX), the audio output of "XX RUSH entry" is controlled to start after audio start time TW5 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and to end the audio output of "XX RUSH entry" simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the end time T2 of the ending period. However, the audio output of "XX RUSH entry" may also be started from the start time T1 of the ending period. In this case, the audio output of "Please hit right" may also be started simultaneously or approximately simultaneously after the audio output of "XX RUSH entry".

In this way, in pattern B of FIG. 49(b), when controlling the audio output of "XX RUSH entering" to start from the start time T1 of the ending period, the value set in the timer counter T may be set to 0 in step S2607 of FIG. 50, or if in step S2606 of FIG. 50 the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the RUSH entry notification time TX (YES), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S2610.

Furthermore, in pattern B of FIG. 49(b), when controlling so that the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" starts from the start time T1 of the ending period, the value of TW5 in the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. 51 may be set to 0, and in step S2706 of FIG. 52, if the type of special pattern is special pattern 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, or if the type of special pattern is special pattern 2 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S2710.

Also, in the above explanation, in pattern C of FIG. 49(c), if the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TE<(TX+TY)), and shorter than the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX (TE<TX), the RUSH entry notification from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "Entering XX RUSH") and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "Please hit right") are controlled to be made after the end time T2 of the ending period TE. However, the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" may be started from the start time T1 of the ending period. In this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may start at the same time or approximately at the same time as the voice output of "Entering XX RUSH" is finished.

In this way, in pattern C of FIG. 49(c), when controlling so that the audio output of "XX RUSH entering" starts from the start time T1 of the ending period, the value set in the timer counter T may be set to 0 in step S2608 of FIG. 50, or, if in step S2606 of FIG. 50 the ending period TE is not longer than the RUSH entry notification time TX (NO), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S2610.

Furthermore, in pattern C of FIG. 49(c), when controlling so that the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" starts from the start time T1 of the ending period, the value of TE in the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. 51 may be set to 0, and in step S2706 of FIG. 52, if the type of special pattern is not special pattern 1 and the mode is not the low probability mode, and if the type of special pattern is not special pattern 2 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S2710.

Next, another example of the transition process to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In the example shown in FIG. 53, the transition process will be described when the ending period TE and the length of the intro part of the music (BGM) in the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, referred to as the intro length TI) are different. Hereinafter, another example of the transition process to the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 53.

<Migration Process A>
First, referring to FIG. 53(a), a case where the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI (where 10 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 48) will be described. In this case, since the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI in the transition process, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of the intro output to the end of the ending period TE. This first special effect is controlled so that, for example, a sound such as "It's starting!" is output from the speaker unit 24, and an image corresponding to this sound (for example, an image of a character speaking) is displayed on the display screen G, and an effect is executed that gives the player a sense of expectation and excitement about the transition to the RUSH mode.

Specifically, from the start time T1 of the ending period TE, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the RUSH mode performance. Also, after the output of the intro part is finished, the A-melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, the first special performance is executed from the end of the intro output to the end of the ending period TE. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the right-hit navigation for RUSH, which suggests right-hit play, is controlled to start. In other words, the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, the video performance of the performance is controlled to start.

The volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to be played back at a lower volume than normal. By making the volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH during RUSH entry lower than normal, the voice of the right-hit navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" is prevented from becoming unpleasant to the player when entering RUSH, and the player can be prevented from losing interest. In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "It's a right hit", characters such as "Please hit right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. In this transition process, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the voice of "Entering RUSH" after the output of the intro part is completed. In the example of FIG. 53(a), the RUSH entry notification is performed before the right-hit navigation, but the RUSH entry notification may be performed after the right-hit navigation.

<Transition Process B>
Next, referring to FIG. 53(b), a case where the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI (when 5 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 48) will be described. In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the intro output. This second special effect displays the number of prize balls and logo marks acquired in the big win game on the display screen G, and an effect is executed that gives the player a feeling as if the ending period is continuing despite being in the RUSH mode. Note that, when the difference between the length of the ending period TE and the intro length TI is long (large), the number of prize balls and logo marks acquired in the big win game may be displayed on the display screen G, or an arbitrary character may be displayed to adjust the time.

Specifically, from the start time T1 of the ending period TE, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 performance. Also, after the output of the intro part ends, the A-melody part following the intro part is controlled to continue. Also, from the end time T2 of the ending period TE until the output of the intro ends, the second special performance is executed. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the right-hit navigation for RUSH, which suggests right-hit play, is controlled to start. In other words, the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at the end time T4 of the intro output, the video performance of the RUSH mode performance is controlled to start.

The volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to be played back at a lower volume than normal. By making the volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH at the time of entering RUSH lower than normal, the voice of the right-hit navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" is prevented from becoming unpleasant to the player when entering RUSH, and the player can be prevented from losing interest. In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "It's a right hit", characters such as "Please hit right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. In addition, in this transition process, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the voice of "Entering RUSH" after the output of the intro part is finished. In the example of FIG. 53(b), the RUSH entry notification is performed after the right-hit navigation, but the RUSH entry notification may be performed before the right-hit navigation.

<Transition Process C>
Next, referring to Fig. 53(c), a case where the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (when 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of Fig. 48) will be described. In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI, the ending period TE ends with almost no intro portion being output during the ending period TE. For this reason, in the case shown in Fig. 53(c), the output of the intro starts after the ending period TE ends. Also, after the output of the intro ends, the A melody portion following the intro portion is controlled to be output continuously.

Specifically, from the end time T2 of the ending period TE, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the RUSH mode presentation. Also, after the output of the intro part has ended, the A-melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the right-hit navigation for RUSH, which suggests right-hit play, is controlled to start. In other words, the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, the video presentation of the RUSH mode presentation is controlled to start.

The volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to be played at a lower volume than normal. By making the volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH at the time of entering RUSH lower than normal, the voice of the right-hit navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" is prevented from becoming unpleasant to the player when entering RUSH, and the player is prevented from losing interest. Furthermore, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the display screen G may be controlled to display text such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Hit right", the display screen G may be controlled to display text such as "Please hit right". Furthermore, in this transition process, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the voice "Entering RUSH" after the output of the intro portion has ended.

In addition, if the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (if 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 48), as shown in FIG. 53(d), the intro portion may not be output, and the speaker unit 24 may be controlled to start outputting the A-melody portion of the music used in the RUSH mode performance from the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Also, in the examples of FIG. 53(c) and FIG. 53(d), the RUSH entry notification is made after the right hit navigation, but the RUSH entry notification may be made before the right hit navigation.

<Performance transition processing>
Next, the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to Fig. 53 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 54 to 57. Fig. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the audio and light emission control device 90 in the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to Fig. 54 will be described.

In step S2801, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 92 checks whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2801 that an ending command has been received (YES), then in step S2802, the MPU 92 acquires information on the type of special symbol in the jackpot game and whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires information on the type of special symbol and whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode based on the type command received from the main control device 60. Also, in step S2801, if the MPU 92 does not determine that an ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance transition process.

In step S2803, the MPU 92 determines whether the type of special symbol for the jackpot game is special symbol 1 and the mode is high probability mode. If the type of special symbol is special symbol 1 and the mode is high probability mode (YES) in step S2803, the MPU 92 executes transition process A (when the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI) described with reference to FIG. 53(a) in step S2804. Details of transition process A will be described later.

If the type of the special symbol for the jackpot game is special symbol 1 and the mode is not high probability mode (NO) in step S2803, the MPU 92 determines in step S2805 whether the type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the mode is low probability mode, or whether the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the mode is high probability mode. If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the mode is low probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the mode is high probability mode (YES) in step S2805, the MPU 92 executes transition process B (when the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI) described with reference to FIG. 53(b) in step S2806. Details of transition process B will be described later.

If, in step S2805, the type of special symbol for the jackpot game is special symbol 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 92 executes, in step S2807, transition process C (when the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI) described with reference to Figures 53(c) and 53(d). Details of transition process C will be described later.

<Migration Process A>
Next, migration processing A in step S2804 in Fig. 54 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing A.
In step S2901, the MPU 92 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of steps S2903 and S2905 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE (10 sec) as the measurement time in the timer counter T1, and sets a value corresponding to the intro length TI as the measurement time in the timer counter T2. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T1 to "5000", and when the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T2 to "3500". The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2902, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the intro part of the music data from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also starts displaying the video for the ending period for the performance. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control device 100 so that the video for the ending period for the performance is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls so that the video for the ending period for the performance is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S2903, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S2901 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion has not ended (NO), it ends transition process A without executing the processes from step S2904 onwards. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion has ended (YES), it executes the processes from step S2904 onwards.

In step S2904, the MPU 92 starts the first special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound of "It's starting!" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound of "It's starting!" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts the output (playback) of the sound of "It's starting!" from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also controls the display screen G to display an image corresponding to this sound (for example, an image of a character speaking). Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a first special effect start command to the display control device 100 so that an image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls the display screen G to display an image corresponding to the sound based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S2904, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound "Entering RUSH" for entering RUSH following the sound "It's starting!" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound "Entering RUSH" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the sound "Entering RUSH" from the speaker unit 24. Note that "It's starting!" may be displayed in text on the display screen and the sound "Entering RUSH" may be output from the speaker unit 24, or the sound "It's starting!" may be output from the speaker unit 24 and the text "Entering RUSH" may be displayed on the display screen G.

In step S2905, the MPU 92 judges whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S2901 is 0. If the MPU 92 judges that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), it ends the transition process A without executing the processes from step S2906 onwards. If the MPU 92 judges that the ending period TE has ended (YES), it executes the processes from step S2906 onwards. In step S2906, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to end the first special effect. This stops the output (playback) of sounds such as "It's starting!" from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also transmits a first special effect stop command to the display control device 100. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls the display of the image corresponding to the sound on the display screen G to be stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S2907, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for the right-hit navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH starts.

In step S2908, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start video presentation for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play video data for the RUSH effect stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data for the RUSH effect from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

The time measurement configuration for steps S2903 and S2905 is arbitrary, and may be performed using a real-time clock (RTC), for example.

<Transition Process B>
Next, migration processing B in step S2806 in Fig. 54 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing B.
In step S3001, the MPU 92 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of steps S3003 and S3005 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE (5 sec) as the measurement time in the timer counter T1, and sets a value corresponding to the intro length TI as the measurement time in the timer counter T2. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T1 to "2500", and when the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T2 to "3500". The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3002, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effects of the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the effects of the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the intro part of the music data from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also starts displaying the effects video for the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control device 100 so that the effects video for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls so that the effects video for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S3003, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3001 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), it ends the transition process B without executing the processes in and after step S3004. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), it executes the processes in and after step S3004. In step S3004, the MPU 92 starts the second special performance. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to display a character image (e.g., Arabic numerals in a logo form) corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the big win game on the display screen G. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display a character image corresponding to the number of prize balls on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 92.

In step S3005, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for the right-hit navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH starts.

In step S3006, the MPU 92 judges whether the output of the intro part of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3001 is 0. If the MPU 92 judges that the output of the intro part has not ended (NO), it ends transition process B without executing the processes in and after step S3007. On the other hand, if the MPU 92 judges that the output of the intro part has ended (YES), it executes the processes in and after step S3007.
In step S3007, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to stop the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 100. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 92 so as to stop the display of a character image corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in a big win game on the display screen G.

In step S3008, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the "RUSH ENTERING" sound for entering the RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the "RUSH ENTERING" sound is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the "RUSH ENTERING" sound from the speaker unit 24. Note that it is also possible to display "RUSH ENTERING" in text on the display screen and output the "RUSH ENTERING" sound from the speaker unit 24.

In step S3009, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start video presentation for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play video data for the RUSH effect stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data for the RUSH effect from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S3003 and S3006 is arbitrary, and may be, for example, measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition Process C>
Next, migration processing C in step S2807 in Fig. 54 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing C.
In step S3101, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T1 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S3102, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE (2 sec) as the measurement time in the timer counter T1. For example, if the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T1 to "1000". The value set in this timer counter T1 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3102, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3101 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), it ends transition process B without executing the processes from step S3103 onwards. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), it executes the processes from step S3103 onwards.

In step S3103, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effects of the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the effects of the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the intro part of the music data from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also starts displaying the effects video for the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control device 100 so that the effects video for the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls so that the effects video for the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S3104, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for the right-hit navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH starts.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3102 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is equipped with a transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning the game state from a jackpot game (first game state) to a RUSH mode (second game state), and a notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for issuing a notification (first notification) of entry into RUSH mode (second game state) at different times depending on the type of jackpot game, specifically, the type of special pattern and whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode, which enables the player to recognize the RUSH mode (second game state). In pachinko machines, the length of the ending period may differ depending on the type of jackpot, specifically the type of special chart and whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode, but in such a case, if the first notification is made without considering the length of the ending period, the first notification may be made across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification may be made after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed), etc., and the first notification may be made at an unnatural timing. However, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment makes the notification of RUSH entry (first notification) at different timings depending on the type of jackpot game (first game state), so that the notification of RUSH entry (first notification) can be made without causing the player to feel unnatural, improving the interest.

(2) The notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment notifies the player of the entry into the RUSH mode (first notification) at different times depending on the length of the ending period of the jackpot game (first game state). This makes it possible to prevent the first notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as by issuing the notification of the entry into the RUSH mode (first notification) without considering the length of the ending period and issuing the first notification across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or issuing the first notification after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed).

(3) The notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment notifies the player of the entry into the RUSH (first notification) at different times depending on whether the length of the ending period of the jackpot game (first game state) is shorter than the time required for the notification of the entry into the RUSH (first notification). This makes it possible to prevent the first notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the notification of the entry into the RUSH (first notification) is issued without taking into account the length of the ending period, and the first notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed).

[Fifth embodiment]
In the above first to fourth embodiments, an embodiment in which the type (type) of the RUSH mode presentation is selected during a round of the jackpot game has been described. In this fifth embodiment, an embodiment in which the type (type) of the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode) presentation is selected during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. Hereinafter, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be assigned the same reference numerals and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

Figure 58 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of the effect type selection process in the fifth embodiment. Note that, for comparison, Figure 58 explains the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to the first to fourth embodiments and the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to the fifth embodiment. Figure 58(a) is a diagram showing the flow when a selection effect is executed during a round of play in the first to fourth embodiments. Figure 58(b) is a diagram showing the flow when a selection effect is executed during the ending period in the fifth embodiment. Note that in Figure 58, "OP" stands for opening, "ED" stands for ending, and "R" stands for round.

First, referring to FIG. 58(a), the flow of effects during a jackpot game when a selection effect is executed during a round of play will be described. In the sound and light emission control device 90, an opening effect is started with the start of a jackpot game (time t10). Next, when the opening time ends, the sound and light emission control device 90 ends the opening effect and starts a round of play, and a round effect is started (time t11). After that, when a predetermined number of rounds of play (e.g., three times) have ended, the sound and light emission control device 90 executes a performance type selection process as a round effect (time t12).

When the audio/light emitting control device 90 executes the effect type selection process during a round of play, the selected effect is executed in the same display mode as when the effect type selection process is executed as an ending effect. After that, when all rounds of play are completed, the audio/light emitting control device 90 ends the round effect and starts the ending effect (time t13). After that, when the ending period ends, the audio/light emitting control device 90 ends the ending effect and the jackpot play ends (time t14). After the jackpot play ends, the selected effect mode (e.g., effect MB) is set, and the audio/light emitting control device 90 displays a background image corresponding to the effect MB.

Next, referring to FIG. 58(b), the flow of effects during a jackpot game when a selection effect is executed during the ending period will be described. In the sound and light emission control device 90, an opening effect is started in conjunction with the start of a jackpot game (time t20). Next, when the opening time ends, in the sound and light emission control device 90, the opening effect ends and a round game starts, and the round effect starts (time t21).

After that, when all the rounds (for example, 15 times) have been played, the sound and light emission control device 90 ends the round presentation and starts the ending presentation (time t22). At this time, the sound and light emission control device 90 executes a selection presentation as the ending presentation. Specifically, the sound and light emission control device 90 displays operation images corresponding to the presentations MA to MC in RUSH mode. Also, the sound and light emission control device 90 displays information corresponding to the currently selected presentation MB larger than information corresponding to presentations MA and MC that are different from the currently selected presentation MB.

In addition, when the operation button 28 is operated during the execution of the selection effect and the selected effect is changed, the audio and light emission control device 90 displays the information corresponding to the newly selected effect MA larger than the information corresponding to the unselected effects MB and MC (time t23). After that, when the ending period ends, the audio and light emission control device 90 ends the ending effect (selection effect) and the jackpot game ends (time t24). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the selected effect mode (in this case, effect MA) is set, and the audio and light emission control device 90 displays a background image corresponding to effect MA.

Figure 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type selection process of the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the effect type selection process is executed during the ending period. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 executes the effect type selection process after receiving the ending command in step S1414 of Figure 25, which is different from the effect decision process of the first to fourth embodiments. In this effect type selection process, the MPU 92 executes steps S3201 to S3213 as shown in Figure 59, thereby causing the player to select the type of effect to be executed in RUSH mode. Below, the effect type selection process of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 59.

In step S3201, the MPU 92 determines whether the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the received type command. If the MPU 92 determines in step S3201 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), it ends the presentation type selection process.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S3201 that the game result is the "most favorable result" (YES), then in step S3202 it determines whether an ending command has been received (whether an ending command flag is stored in the various flag areas of the RAM 94). If the MPU 92 determines in step S3202 that an ending command has not been received (NO), then it ends the presentation type selection process.

In step S3202, if the MPU 92 determines that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S3203, it sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE to a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the ending period. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3204, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to start a performance for selecting a performance type. In the display control device 100, based on instructions from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display an image of the performance for selecting a performance type, specifically the image shown in FIG. 30 (I), on the display screen G.

In step S3205, the MPU 92 accepts the player's selection of the presentation type modes MA, MB, and MC using the operation button 28. The player presses the left button 282 and/or the right button 283 of the operation button 28 to select an image corresponding to the desired presentation MA-MC from the images GA-GC displayed on the display screen G. In this step S3205, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. In the display control device 100, based on instructions from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

When the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC based on instructions from the MPU 92. In the display control device 100, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB based on instructions from the MPU 92.

In step S3206, the MPU 92 determines whether the player has operated the operation button 28 to determine the effect, i.e., whether or not the pressing of the decision button 281 has been accepted. If it is determined in step S3206 that the pressing of the decision button 281 has been accepted (YES), in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the RUSH mode. In other words, if the decision operation is accepted in step S3206 with the image GA selected, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets the effect MA as the effect of the RUSH mode to which the mode will be transitioned after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for effect MA as the effect of the RUSH mode in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94.

Also, in step S3206, if a confirm operation is received with image GB selected, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets effect MB as the effect of the RUSH mode to be transitioned to after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for effect MB as the effect of the RUSH mode in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. Also, in step S3206, if a confirm operation is received with image GC selected, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets a flag for effect MC as the effect of the RUSH mode to be transitioned to after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for effect MC as the effect of the RUSH mode in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94.

In step S3208, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE set in step S3203 has elapsed based on the value of the timer counter. If it is determined in step S3208 that the ending period TE has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 ends the performance type selection process. If it is determined in step S3208 that the ending period TE has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 instructs the player in step S3209 to make a notification to confirm whether or not to cancel the determined performance.

Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display a text image such as "Cancel the performance?" on the display screen G to confirm whether to cancel the determined performance. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display a text image such as "Cancel the performance?" on the display screen G based on an instruction from the MPU 92. The MPU 92 also controls the speaker unit 24 to output the voice "Cancel the performance?". Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice "Cancel the performance?" stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 to output the voice "Cancel the performance?" from the speaker unit 24.

In step S3210, the MPU 92 determines whether the effect determined in step S3206 has been canceled. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether the effect has been canceled based on the player's operation of the operation button 28. If it is determined in step S3210 that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 92 returns to the operation of step S3205. Also, if it is determined in step S3210 that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection processing.

Also, in step S3206, if it is determined that the pressing operation of the decision button 281 has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 92 in step S3211 determines whether the ending period set in step S3203 has ended based on the value of the timer counter. In step S3211, if it is determined that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 in step S3212 sets a performance (e.g., performance MA) that has been determined in advance by initial setting as the performance in the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag for performance MA as the performance in the RUSH mode in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. Note that, in step S3211, if it is determined that the ending period has ended (YES), the performance corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the performance in the RUSH mode. Note that, when the MPU 92 sets the performance in step S3213, it ends the performance processing for performance type selection.

Also, if it is not determined in step S3211 that the ending period has ended (NO), the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to make a notification to prompt the player to select and decide on a performance in step S3213. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display text images such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!" on the display screen G to prompt the player to select and decide on a performance, based on instructions from the MPU 92. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display text images such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!" on the display screen G to prompt the player to select and decide on a performance. The MPU 92 also controls the speaker unit 24 to output sounds such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!". Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93, corresponding to sounds such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!", sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that sounds such as "Decide on the performance!" and "Decide on the performance!" are output from the speaker unit 24.

Figure 60 is a diagram for explaining the timing of RUSH entry and RUSH right-hit navigation in the fifth embodiment. As shown in Figure 60, in the fifth embodiment, the RUSH presentation is determined during the ending period of the big win game, so the pachinko machine 10 changes the timing of RUSH entry and the notification of RUSH right-hit navigation (suggestion of right-hit game when transitioning to RUSH mode) depending on the remaining time of the ending period after the presentation is determined. The transition process to RUSH mode will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 60.

In the fifth embodiment, since the RUSH mode effects are selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode effects have not been determined at the start of the ending period, and it is not possible to output (play) RUSH mode music from the start of the ending period. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, as shown in Figures 60(a) to (c), the output (play) of RUSH mode music (BGM) is controlled to start from time T3 when the RUSH mode effects are determined.

<Pattern A>
First, referring to Figure 60 (a), a case will be described in which the remaining time TR (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining time TR) of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode presentation is equal to or greater than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TR ≧ (TX + TY)).

As shown in Figure 60 (a), when the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY, the RUSH entry notification from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, the voice output (playback) of "Entering XX RUSH") and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, the voice output (playback) of "Please hit right") are controlled to be made within the remaining time TR.
More specifically, the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" begins after the time (TR-(TX+TY)) has elapsed from the time T3 when the effect is decided, obtained by subtracting the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY from the remaining time TR, and after the notification of the RUSH entry, the audio output of "Please hit right" begins.

<Pattern B>
Next, referring to Figure 60 (b), we will explain the case where the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode presentation is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TR < (TX + TY)), and is equal to or longer than the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX (TR ≥ TX). As shown in Figure 60 (b), if the remaining time TR is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY, but is greater than or equal to the RUSH entry notification time TX, the speaker unit 24 will notify you of the entry into the RUSH (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "Entering XX RUSH") within the remaining time TR, and the audio output of the RUSH right-hit navigation notification (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "Please hit right") will be controlled to be made after the ending period ends.

More specifically, the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" begins a time (TR-TX) after the remaining time TR minus the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX has elapsed from the time T3 when the effect is decided, followed by the audio output of "Please hit right."

<Pattern C>
Next, referring to Fig. 60(c), a case will be described in which the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode performance is shorter than the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX (TR<TX). As shown in Fig. 60(c), when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is shorter than the RUSH entry notification time TX, the notification of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "XX RUSH entry") is controlled to be performed after the end time T2 of the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" is started after the remaining time TR has elapsed from the time T3 when the performance is decided. Also, in the case shown in FIG. 60(c), the video right-hit navigation for RUSH is started at the end time T2 of the ending period TE. If the audio output of "Please hit right" is started immediately after the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH", the right-hit navigation for RUSH has not started even though the player has already entered RUSH mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, if the audio of "Please hit right" is output at the same time as entering RUSH mode, the audio will overlap with "Entering RUSH". For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 60(c), the audio of "Please hit right" is not output, and the video right-hit navigation for RUSH is started at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, and the audio output of "Please hit right" is started after the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH".

In the fifth embodiment, the RUSH mode effects are selected and determined during the ending period, so the RUSH mode effects have not been determined at the start of the ending period, and RUSH mode music cannot be output (played) from the start of the ending period. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the output (playback) of RUSH mode music (BGM) is controlled to start from the point at which the RUSH mode effects are determined.

Figure 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to RUSH mode in the fifth embodiment. The transition process to RUSH mode in the fifth embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 61. In this transition process to the RUSH mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S3301 to S3315 as shown in Figure 61. Note that in the fifth embodiment, the RUSH mode performance is selected and determined during the ending period, so the RUSH mode performance has not been determined at the start of the ending period, and it is not possible to output (play) RUSH mode music from the start of the ending period. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, the output (play) of RUSH mode music (BGM) is started from the point at which the RUSH mode performance is determined.

In step S3301, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 92 checks whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S3301 that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S3302, the MPU 92 acquires the ending period TE. Here, the ending period TE may be acquired by including information on the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command sent from the main control device 60, or the duration of the ending period TE may be pre-stored in the ROM 93 of the audio and light emission control device 90 so that it can be acquired.

Next, in step S3303, the MPU 92 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S3306, which will be described later. Also, in step S3301, if the MPU 92 determines that an ending command has not been received (NO), it ends the performance transition process.

Next, in step S3304, the MPU 92 determines whether the type (type) of the RUSH mode to be transitioned to after a big win game has been determined. If the type (type) of the RUSH mode to be transitioned to after a big win game has been determined in step S3304 (YES), in step S3305, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the RUSH mode to be transitioned to after a big win game. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the determined effects MA to MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the intro part of the RUSH mode music corresponding to the determined effect from the speaker unit 24.

More specifically, when a performance MA is determined, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the performance MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. When a performance MB is determined, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the performance MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, when a performance MC has been determined, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the performance MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24.

Next, in step S3306, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time TR of the ending period TE (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining time TR). Specifically, the MPU 92 stops the timer started in step S3303, and calculates the time that started in step S3303 and stopped in step S3306 (hereinafter also referred to as the measured time). Next, the MPU 92 subtracts the measured time from the ending period TE to calculate the remaining time TR of the ending period TE. Also, in step S3304, if the MPU 92 does not determine that the type of presentation of the RUSH mode to which the game will be transitioned after the big win game has been determined (NO), the MPU 92 ends the presentation transition process.

In step S3307, the MPU 92 determines whether the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY (TR≧(TX+TY)). In step S3307, if the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY (YES), the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S3308 to measure the time of step S3312 described below. Specifically, the timer counter T is set to a value corresponding to the time (TR-(TX+TY)) obtained by subtracting the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY from the remaining time TR. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3307, if the remaining time TR is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time TY (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3309 whether the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the RUSH entry notification time TX (TE≧TX). In step S3309, if the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the RUSH entry notification time TX (YES), the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S3312 described later in step S3310. Specifically, the timer counter T is set to a value corresponding to the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX from the remaining time TR. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If, in step S3309, the remaining time TR is shorter than the RUSH entry notification time TX (NO), in step S3311, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S3312, which will be described later. Specifically, a value corresponding to the remaining time TR is set in the timer counter T. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3312, the MPU 92 determines whether the time set in step S3308, step S3310, or step S3311 has elapsed, i.e., whether the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. In step S3312, if the time set in step S3308, step S3310, or step S3311 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance transition process.

Also, if it is determined in step S3312 that the time set in step S3308, step S3310, or step S3311 has elapsed (YES), in step S3313, the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound data of the RUSH entry. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data of the RUSH entry from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data of the RUSH entry is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the sound of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24.

In step S3314, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry has been completed. If the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry has been completed in step S3314 (YES), in step S3315, the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound data of the right-hit navigation for the RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data of the right-hit navigation for the RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data of the RUSH entry is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the sound of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24. Also, if the output of the sound data of the RUSH entry has not been completed in step S3314 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the performance transition process.

In the above explanation, in pattern B of FIG. 60(b), if the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TE<(TX+TY)), and is equal to or longer than the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX (TE≧TX), the audio output of "XX RUSH entry" is controlled to start after the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX from the remaining time TR has elapsed from the time T3 when the performance is determined. However, the audio output of "XX RUSH entry" may also be started from the time T3 when the performance is determined. Also, even in this case, the audio output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or approximately at the same time after the audio output of "XX RUSH entry".

In this way, in pattern B of Figure 60 (b), when controlling so that the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" starts from the determination time T3 of the performance, the value set in the timer counter T may be 0 in step S3310 of Figure 61, or if in step S3309 of Figure 61 the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is equal to or greater than the notification time TX of entering RUSH (YES), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S3313.

In the above explanation, in pattern C of FIG. 60(c), if the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX and the RUSH right-hit navigation notification time (audio output time) TY (TE<(TX+TY)), and shorter than the RUSH entry notification time (audio output time) TX (TE<TX), the notification of the RUSH entry from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, the audio output (playback) of "Entering XX RUSH") is controlled to be made after the end time T2 of the ending period TE. However, the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" may be started from the time T3 when the performance is decided. In this case, the audio output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or approximately at the same time after the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH".

In this way, in pattern C of Figure 60 (c), when controlling so that the audio output of "Entering XX RUSH" is started from the determination time T3 of the effect, the value set in the timer counter T may be set to 0 in step S3311 of Figure 61, or if in step S3309 of Figure 61 the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is not equal to or greater than the notification time TX of entering RUSH (NO), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S3313.

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is equipped with a transition means (MPU 62) that transitions the game state from a jackpot game (first game state) to a RUSH mode (second game state) which is transitioned to after the jackpot game, a notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) that issues a notification (first notification) of entry into the RUSH mode which enables the player to recognize the RUSH mode, and an operation means (operation button 28) that accepts the determination of the type of presentation for the RUSH mode (second game state), and the notification control means issues the notification (first notification) of entry into the RUSH mode at different timings depending on the timing at which the type of presentation for the RUSH mode (second game state) is determined.

There are pachinko machines in which the type of presentation for the RUSH mode to which the player transitions after a jackpot game is selected during the ending period of the jackpot game. In such a case, if the player is notified of the start of the RUSH mode without considering the timing at which the type of presentation for the RUSH mode is determined, in other words the length of time remaining in the ending period, the first notification may be made at an unnatural timing, such as between the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after the player has entered the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). However, according to the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment, the notification of the start of the RUSH mode is made at different times depending on the timing at which the selection of the type of presentation for the RUSH mode is accepted, so that the player can be notified of the start of the RUSH mode without feeling unnatural, and the interest can be improved.

(2) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment notifies the player of the entry into the RUSH mode at different times depending on the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique. This prevents the first notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first notification is issued without considering the remaining time of the ending period, and when the first notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed).

(3) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment notifies the player of the entry into the RUSH at different times depending on whether the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique is shorter than the time required to notify the player of the entry into the RUSH. This prevents the first notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the notification of the entry into the RUSH is issued without taking into account the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed).

[Modifications of the fourth and fifth embodiments]
In addition, even in the case where the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10 as described in the above fourth embodiment, the form of selecting the type (type) of the RUSH mode during a round of play in the fifth embodiment can be applied. In this case, the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10, and the type (type) of the RUSH mode presentation is selected during this changing ending period.

However, the decision as to whether to make the first notification ("Enter RUSH") and the second notification ("Please hit right") during the ending period, to make only the first notification during the ending period and make the second notification when entering RUSH mode, or not to make the first and second notifications during the ending period and make the first and second notifications when entering RUSH mode depends on the remaining time TR of the ending period. Therefore, when the ending period changes depending on the type (type) of special symbol and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the fourth embodiment, the transition process flow chart described with reference to FIG. 61 can also be used when applying the form of selecting the type (type) of RUSH mode presentation during a round of play of the fifth embodiment.

Specifically, when an ending command is received in step S3301 of FIG. 61 (YES), an ending period TE corresponding to the type of symbol and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the jackpot game is acquired in step S3302 of FIG. 61 as in step S2602 of FIG. 50. Then, when calculating the remaining time TR in step S3306 of FIG. 61, the measured time is subtracted from the ending period TE corresponding to the type of symbol and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the jackpot game to calculate the remaining time TR of the ending period TE, thereby applying the form of selecting the type (type) of the RUSH mode presentation during round play in the fifth embodiment when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment.

<Migration Process A>
First, referring to FIG. 62(a), a case where the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI (for example, when the effect is selected immediately after the beginning of the ending period TE) will be described. In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. This first special effect is controlled so that, for example, a sound such as "It's starting!" is output from the speaker unit 24, and an image corresponding to this sound (for example, an image of a character speaking) is displayed on the display screen G, and an effect is executed that gives the player a sense of expectation and excitement about the transition to the RUSH mode.

Specifically, from the time T3 when the RUSH mode performance is decided, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the RUSH mode performance. Also, after the output of the intro part is finished, the A-melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, the first special performance is executed from the end of the intro output to the end of the ending period TE. Also, at the end of the ending period T2, the right-hit navigation for RUSH, which suggests right-hit play, is controlled to start. In other words, the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at the end of the ending period TE T2, the video performance for the RUSH performance is controlled to start.

The volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to be played back at a lower volume than normal. By making the volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH during RUSH entry lower than normal, the voice of the right-hit navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" is prevented from becoming unpleasant to the ears of the player when entering RUSH, and the player is prevented from losing interest. In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "It's a right hit", characters such as "Please hit right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. In addition, in this transition process, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the voice of "Entering RUSH" after the output of the intro part is completed. In the example of FIG. 62(a), the RUSH entry notification is performed after the right-hit navigation, but the RUSH entry notification may be performed before the right-hit navigation.

<Transition Process B>
Next, referring to FIG. 62(b), a case where the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI (for example, when the performance is selected after a few seconds have passed since the beginning of the ending period) will be described. In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special performance is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the intro output. This second special performance displays the number of prize balls and logo mark acquired in the big win game on the display screen G, and performs a performance that gives the player a feeling as if the ending period is continuing despite being in the RUSH mode. Note that, when the difference between the length of the remaining time TR and the intro length TI is long (large), the number of prize balls and logo mark acquired in the big win game may be displayed on the display screen G, or an arbitrary character may be displayed to adjust the time.

Specifically, from the time T3 when the RUSH mode performance is decided, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 performance. Also, after the output of the intro part is finished, the A melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, the second special performance is executed from the end time T2 of the ending period TE until the output of the intro is finished. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the right-hit navigation for RUSH, which suggests right-hit play, is controlled to start. In other words, the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at the end of the intro output, the video performance of the RUSH mode performance is controlled to start.

The volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to be played back at a lower volume than normal. By making the volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH at the time of entering RUSH lower than normal, the voice of the right-hit navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" is prevented from becoming unpleasant to the player when entering RUSH, and the player can be prevented from losing interest. In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the display screen G may be controlled to display characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "It's a right hit", the display screen G may be controlled to display characters such as "Please hit right". In this transition process, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the voice of "Entering RUSH" after the output of the intro part is completed. In the example of FIG. 62(b), the RUSH entry notification is performed after the right-hit navigation, but the RUSH entry notification may be performed before the right-hit navigation.

<Transition Process C>
Next, referring to Fig. 62(c), a case where the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI (for example, when a performance is selected just before the end of the ending period TE) will be described. In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, the ending period TE ends with almost no intro portion being output during the ending period TE. For this reason, in the case shown in Fig. 62(c), the output of the intro starts after the ending period TE ends. In addition, after the output of the intro ends, the A melody portion following the intro portion is controlled to be output continuously.

Specifically, from the end time T2 of the ending period TE, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the RUSH mode presentation. Also, after the output of the intro part has ended, the A-melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the right-hit navigation for RUSH, which suggests right-hit play, is controlled to start. In other words, the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, the video presentation of the RUSH mode presentation is controlled to start.

The volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to be played at a lower volume than normal. By making the volume of the right-hit navigation for RUSH at the time of entering RUSH lower than normal, it is possible to prevent the voice of the right-hit navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" from becoming unpleasant to the ears of the player when entering RUSH, and to prevent the player from losing interest. In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, the display screen G may be controlled to display text such as "Please hit right" to suggest right-hit play. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Hit right", the display screen G may be controlled to display text such as "Please hit right". In this transition process, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the voice "Entering RUSH" after the output of the intro portion has ended.

In addition, if the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the intro portion may not be output, and the speaker unit 24 may be controlled to start outputting the A-melody portion of the music used in the RUSH mode performance from the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Also, in the examples of FIG. 62(c) and FIG. 62(d), the RUSH entry notification is made after the right hit navigation, but the RUSH entry notification may be made before the right hit navigation.

<Performance transition processing>
Next, the process of transitioning to the RUSH mode described with reference to Fig. 62 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 63 to Fig. 67. Fig. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of transitioning to the RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the audio and light emission control device 90 in the process of transitioning to the RUSH mode described with reference to Fig. 62 will be described.

In step S3401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 92 checks whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. In step S3401, if the MPU 92 determines that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S3402, the MPU 92 acquires the ending period TE based on the ending command. Note that the ending period TE may be acquired by including information on the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 60, or a value corresponding to the indicated ending period TE may be stored in the ROM 93 of the sound and light emission control device 90, and the type of jackpot may be determined from the command type to recognize the ending period TE. In addition, in step S3401, if the MPU 92 does not determine that an ending command has been received (NO), the performance transition process is terminated.

In step S3403, the MPU 92 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S3405, which will be described later.
Next, in step S3404, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the type (type) of the presentation of the RUSH mode to be transitioned to after the big win game has been determined. If the type (type) of the presentation of the RUSH mode to be transitioned to after the big win game has not been determined (NO) in step S3404, the MPU 92 ends the presentation transition process.
In addition, in step S3404, if the type (type) of the RUSH mode to which the game will be switched after the big win game is played has been determined (YES), in step S3405, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time TR. Specifically, the MPU 92 stops the timer started in step S3403, and subtracts the time measured by the timer from the ending period TE acquired in step S3402 to calculate the remaining time TR of the ending.

In step S3406, the MPU 92 determines whether the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI of the music (BGM) for the selected effect. If the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI in step S3406 (YES), the MPU 92 executes transition process D (when the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI) described with reference to FIG. 62(a) in step S3407. Details of transition process D will be described later.

If the remaining time TR is not longer than the intro length TI in step S3406 (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3408 whether the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI. If the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI in step S3408 (YES), the MPU 92 executes transition process E (when the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI) in step S3409. Details of transition process E will be described later.

If the remaining time TR is not the same as the intro length TI in step S3408 (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3410 whether the remaining time TR is longer than half the intro length TI (TI/2). If the remaining time TR is longer than half the intro length TI (TI/2) in step S3410 (YES), the MPU 92 executes transition process F (when the remaining time TR is longer than half the intro length TI (TI/2)) described with reference to FIG. 62(b) in step S3411. Details of transition process F will be described later.

If, in step S3410, the remaining time TR is not longer than half the intro length TI (TI/2) (NO), the MPU 92 executes, in step S3412, transition process G (when the remaining time TR is not longer than half the intro length TI (TI/2)) described with reference to Figures 62(c) and 62(d). Details of transition process G will be described later.

Note that in step S3410, the case is distinguished as an example where the remaining time TR is not longer than half the intro length TI (TI/2), but the length of the remaining time TR that is distinguished in step S3410 is arbitrary, and for example, the case may be distinguished when it is 2 sec or less.

<Transition Process D>
Next, migration processing D in step S3407 in Fig. 63 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing D.
In step S3501, the MPU 92 calculates the absolute value |TR-TI| of the remaining time TR minus the length TI of the introduction.
In step S3502, the MPU 92 sets timer counters T2 and T3 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in steps S3504 and S3506 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the length TI of the intro as the measured time in the timer counter T2, and sets a value corresponding to the absolute value (|TR-TI|) calculated in step S3501 as the measured time in the timer counter T3. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the length TI of the intro is 10 sec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T2 to "5000", and if the absolute value is 2 sec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T3 to "1000". The values set in the timer counters T2 and T3 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3503, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the RUSH mode effects. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode effects from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the intro portion of the music data from the speaker unit 24.

In step S3504, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3502 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion has not ended (NO), it ends transition process D without executing the processes from step S3505 onwards. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion has ended (YES), it executes the processes from step S3505 onwards.

In step S3505, the MPU 92 starts the first special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound of "It's starting!" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound of "It's starting!" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts the output (playback) of the sound of "It's starting!" from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also controls the display screen G to display an image corresponding to this sound (for example, an image of a character speaking). Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a first special effect start command to the display control device 100 so that an image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls the display screen G to display an image corresponding to the sound based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S3505, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound "Entering RUSH" for entering RUSH following the sound "It's starting!" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound "Entering RUSH" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the sound "Entering RUSH" from the speaker unit 24. Note that "It's starting!" may be displayed in text on the display screen and the sound "Entering RUSH" may be output from the speaker unit 24, or the sound "It's starting!" may be output from the speaker unit 24 and the text "Entering RUSH" may be displayed on the display screen G.

In step S3506, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T3 set in step S3502 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), it ends the transition process D without executing the processes in steps S3507 and after. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), it executes the processes in steps S3507 and after. In step S3507, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to end the first special effect. This stops the output (playback) of sounds such as "It's starting!" from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also transmits a first special effect stop command to the display control device 100. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls the display of the image corresponding to the sound on the display screen G to be stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S3508, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for the right-hit navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH starts.

In step S3509, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start video presentation for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play video data for the RUSH effect stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data for the RUSH effect from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

The time measurement configuration for steps S3504 and S3506 is arbitrary, and may be performed using a real-time clock (RTC), for example.

<Transition Process E>
Next, the migration process E in step S3409 in Fig. 63 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 65. Fig. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the migration process E.
In step S3601, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S3603 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the length TI of the intro as the measurement time in the timer counter T2. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the length TI of the intro is 10 sec, the MPU 92 sets "5000" in the timer counter T2. The value set in the timer counter T2 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 63, since the length TI of the intro and the remaining time TR are the same length, instead of setting a value corresponding to the length TI of the intro in the timer counter T2 in step S3601, a value corresponding to the remaining time TR may be set in the timer counter T4.

In step S3602, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effects of the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the effects of the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the intro part of the music data from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also starts displaying the effects video for the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control device 100 so that the effects video for the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls so that the effects video for the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S3603, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3602 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion has not ended (NO), it ends transition process D without executing the processes from step S3605 onwards. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion has ended (YES), it executes the processes from step S3604 onwards.

In step S3604, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for the right-hit navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH starts.

In step S3605, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start video presentation for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play video data for the RUSH effect stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data for the RUSH effect from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3603 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition Process F>
Next, the migration process F in step S3411 in Fig. 62 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the migration process F.
In step S3701, the MPU 92 sets timer counters T2 and T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in steps S3703 and S3704 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the length TI of the intro as the measured time in the timer counter T2, and sets a value corresponding to the remaining time TR as the measured time in the timer counter T4. For example, if the period of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the length TI of the intro is 10 sec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T2 to "5000", and if the remaining time TR is 7 sec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T4 to "3500". The values set in the timer counters T2 and T4 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3702, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the RUSH mode effects. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode effects from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts outputting (playing) the intro part of the music data from the speaker unit 24.

In step S3703, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S3701 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), it ends the transition process F without executing the processes in and after step S3704. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), it executes the processes in and after step S3704. In step S3704, the MPU 92 executes the second special performance. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to display a character image (e.g., Arabic numerals in a logo form) corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the big win game on the display screen G. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display a character image corresponding to the number of prize balls on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 92.

In step S3705, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for the right-hit navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH starts.

In step S3706, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3701 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion has not ended (NO), it ends transition process F without executing the processes in and after step S3707. On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion has ended (YES), it executes the processes in and after step S3707.
In step S3707, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to stop the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 100. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 92 so as to stop the display of a character image corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in a big win game on the display screen G.

In step S3708, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the "RUSH ENTERING" sound for entering the RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the "RUSH ENTERING" sound is output from the speaker unit 24. This causes the speaker unit 24 to start notifying the "RUSH ENTERING" or in other words, outputting (playing) the sound of "RUSH ENTERING". Note that it is also possible to display "RUSH ENTERING" in text on the display screen and output the sound of "RUSH ENTERING" from the speaker unit 24.

In step S3709, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start video presentation for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and play video data for the RUSH effect stored in the performance data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data for the RUSH effect from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

The time measurement configuration for steps S3703 and S3706 is arbitrary, and may be performed using a real-time clock (RTC), for example.

<Transition Process G>
Next, the migration process G in step S3412 in Fig. 63 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the migration process G.
In step S3801, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time in step S3802, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the remaining time TR as the measurement time in the timer counter T4. For example, if the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the remaining time TR is 2 sec, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter T4 to "1000". The value set in this timer counter T4 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3802, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S3801 is 0. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), it ends the transition process G without executing the processes from step S3803 onwards. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), it executes the processes from step S3803 onwards.

In step S3803, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effects of the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the effects of the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the intro part of the music data from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 also starts displaying the effects video for the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control device 100 so that the effects video for the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls so that the effects video for the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In step S3804, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for the right-hit navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker unit 24. This starts output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24, and the right-hit navigation for RUSH starts.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3802 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

[Inventions extracted from each embodiment]
The following describes the features of the present invention extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments. Note that, among the features of the present invention, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-mentioned embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention are not limited to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, and any combination of features, such as modifications and improvements, within the scope of achieving the purpose of the features of the present invention are included in the features of the present invention.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A1 is
A transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning a game state from a first game state (jackpot game state) to a second game state (RUSH mode) different from the first game state;
and a playback control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for playing back the music data of the second gaming state during the first gaming state.

According to Feature A1 of the present invention, when transitioning from a first game state to a second game state, playback of the music for the second game state begins during the first game state, so the game state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game states. This makes the game more entertaining.

Feature A2.
A gaming machine according to feature A2 is a gaming machine according to feature A1,
The first gaming state is a specific gaming state (jackpot gaming) that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state,
The playback control means is characterized in that it controls so that the music data is played during an ending period of the first game state.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group, control is performed so that music data for the second game state (RUSH mode) transitioned to after the first game state (jackpot game) is played during the ending period of the specific game state. In other words, control is performed so that music data for the second game state is played at the end of the first game state. This makes it possible to more effectively transition between modes without interrupting the flow from the specific game state to the game state after the specific game state (RUSH mode), allowing the player to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game states. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A3.
A gaming machine according to feature A3 is a gaming machine according to feature A2,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the music data is reproduced at the start of the ending period.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the playback control means plays music data at the start of the ending period, so that there is no sense of incongruity even if music playback starts during the first game state, and mode transition can be made more smoothly without interrupting the flow from the first game state to the second game state.

Feature A4.
A gaming machine according to feature A4 is a gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3,
a first notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for making a first notification (entering RUSH) that allows a player to recognize a second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature A4 of the present invention, a first notification is provided that allows the player to recognize the second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state, so the player can recognize the second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state. This can increase the player's attention to the game and improve the player's sense of anticipation for the game.

Feature A5.
A gaming machine according to feature A5 is a gaming machine according to feature A4,
The first notification control means is characterized in that the first notification ends when reproduction of an intro portion of the music ends.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the first notification ends when the intro section of the music finishes playing, so the end of the first notification coincides with the end of the intro section of the music, providing a sense of unity and exhilaration.

Feature A6.
The gaming machine according to the feature A6 is the gaming machine according to the feature A4 or A5,
The first notification control means is characterized in that the first notification is started during an ending period of the first game state.

According to feature A6 of the present invention, the first notification is initiated during the ending period of the first game state, so the player can learn about the second game state to which the player transitions after the first game state while still in the first game state. This can increase the player's attention to the game and heighten anticipation for the next game state.

Feature A7.
The gaming machine according to the feature A7 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features A4 to A6,
The first notification is a voice notification.

According to feature A7 of the present invention, the first notification is given by sound, so that it can be reliably notified even to players who are looking away from the gaming machine, i.e., players who are not paying attention to the display screen G.

Feature A8.
A gaming machine according to feature A8 is a gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
The gaming machine includes:
The game machine further includes a second notification control means (MPU 102, pattern display device 51) for causing a second notification to be given at the end of the first game state, which enables the player to recognize that the game ball should be launched so as to flow down the specified area.

According to feature A8 of the present invention, in so-called right-hand play machines, advantageous playing methods can be notified to the player.

Feature A9.
A gaming machine according to feature A9 is a gaming machine according to feature A8,
The second notification control means (MPU 102, pattern display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is performed by video or image.

According to feature A9 of the present invention group, the second notification is made by video or image, so that the player can be drawn to the pattern display device 51.

Feature A10.
The gaming machine according to the feature A10 is a gaming machine according to the features A1 to A9,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
The gaming machine includes:
The game machine further comprises a third notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for causing a third notification to be given at the end of the first game state, which enables the player to recognize that the game ball should be launched so as to flow down the specified area.

According to feature A10 of the present invention, in so-called right-hand play machines, advantageous playing methods can be notified to the player.

Feature A11.
A gaming machine according to feature A11 is a gaming machine according to feature A10,
The third notification control means is characterized in that the third notification is made by voice.

According to feature A11 of the present invention, the third notification is made by voice, so that it can be reliably notified even to players who are looking away from the gaming machine, i.e., players who are not paying attention to the display screen G.

Feature A12.
The gaming machine according to the feature A12 is the gaming machine according to the feature A10 or A11,
The third notification control means is
The present invention is characterized in that after the first notification is made by the first notification means, the third notification is made successively.

According to feature A12 of the present invention group, the first and third notifications do not overlap, so the audio notifications do not overlap, preventing the player from not being able to hear at least one of the first and third notifications.

Feature A13.
A gaming machine according to feature A13 is a gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12,
The gaming machine is,
A selection operation means (operation button 28) for receiving a selection of a presentation type of a second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state;
A performance setting means (MPU 92) for setting the performance received by the selection operation means as a performance of a second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature A13 of the present invention, the presentation of the second game state to which the game transitions after the first game state can be selected, thereby expanding the range of choices available to the player and providing presentations that suit the preferences of a wide variety of players, thereby improving interest.

Feature A14.
A gaming machine according to feature A14 is the gaming machine according to feature A13,
A presentation type selection control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is provided for selecting a presentation type of a second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized by performing an effect for selecting the effect type during the first gaming state.

According to feature A14 of the present invention group, since the presentation can be selected during the first game state, the presentation of the next game state can be known during the first game state, thereby increasing the player's attention.

Feature A15.
A gaming machine according to feature A15 is the gaming machine according to feature A14,
The effect setting means is characterized in that, if the selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first game state, a predetermined type of effect or the effect being selected by the selection operation means is set as the effect of the game state to be transitioned to after the first game state.

According to feature A15 of the present invention group, if the selection of the type of effect is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first game state, a predetermined type of effect or the effect being selected by the selection operation means is set as the effect of the game state to be transitioned to after the first game state, so that even if the player does not perform a selection operation, the effect of the game state to be transitioned to after the first game state can be set.

According to group A of features of the present invention, the game state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the game state, so the player can enjoy playing the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the continuous flow of the game state. This makes it possible to solve the following problems:

Normally, the presentation of images, music, lamp lighting patterns, etc. differs for each game state. For this reason, when the game state changes, the presentation also changes. However, in conventional gaming machines, when the game state changes, the presentation of images, music, etc. suddenly changes, interrupting the flow of presentation. For the player, this interrupts the flow of the game, which can reduce the interest of the player. It cannot be said that interest has been sufficiently improved in this regard, and there is still room for improvement.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B1 is
a storage means (ROM 93) in which first data corresponding to a first notification (entering a RUSH mode) that allows a player to recognize a gaming state and an intro portion of music for the gaming state, and second data corresponding to a portion of the music other than the intro portion, are stored;
and a reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for repeatedly reproducing the second data after the first data has been reproduced.

According to feature B1 of the present invention, the game machine includes a storage means storing first data corresponding to the first notification and the intro part of the music in the game state that allows the player to recognize the game state (RUSH mode) and second data corresponding to the part other than the intro part of the music, and a playback control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) that causes the second data to be repeatedly played after the first data is played. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the music data and the first notification data separately in the storage means, and it is also not necessary to measure time to determine the timing for outputting the first notification. Therefore, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the storage means (ROM 93). In addition, it is possible to reduce the calculation processing of the MPU 92. In addition, the first notification included in the first data allows the player to recognize the game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game and increase the expectation for the game. In addition, the first data, which includes the data for the first notification, is not repeatedly played back, but the second data is repeatedly played back, so the player does not feel annoyed by the repeated playback of the first notification.

Feature B2.
A gaming machine according to feature B2 is a gaming machine according to feature B1,
The first notification notifies a second gaming state (RUSH mode) to which the game is transitioned after the first gaming state (jackpot game),
The reproduction control means controls the reproduction of the first data during the first gaming state.

According to feature B2 of the present invention group, when transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, a first notification is made during the first game state to make the player aware of the state of the second game state, so that the player can know about the second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state while in the first game state. This can increase the player's attention to the game and can increase the player's anticipation for the next game state. In addition, when transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, playback of music containing the first data of the second game state is started during the first game state, so the game state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows. This can increase the interest of the game.

Feature B3.
A gaming machine according to feature B3 is a gaming machine according to feature B2,
The first gaming state is a specific gaming state (jackpot gaming) that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the first data is reproduced during an ending period of the first game state.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the music data for the second game state (RUSH mode) to which the game transitions after the first game state (jackpot game) is controlled to be played during the ending period of the specific game state. In other words, the music data for the second game state is controlled to be played at the end of the first game state. This makes it possible to more effectively transition between modes without interrupting the flow from the specific game state to the game state after the specific game state (RUSH mode), allowing the player to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game states. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B4.
The gaming machine according to the feature B4 is the gaming machine according to the feature B3,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the first data stored in the storage means is reproduced at the start of the ending period.

According to feature B4 of the present invention, the playback control means plays the first data stored in the storage means when the ending period starts, so there is no sense of incongruity when music playback starts from the first game state to the second game state, and mode transition can be made more smoothly without interrupting the flow from the first game state to the second game state.

Feature B5.
The gaming machine according to the feature B5 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4,
The data corresponding to the first notification is stored in the storage means so that reproduction of the first notification ends when reproduction of the intro portion ends.

According to feature B5 of the present invention, the data corresponding to the first notification is stored in the storage means so that the playback of the first notification ends when the playback of the intro part ends, so that the end of the first notification coincides with the end of the intro part of the music, providing a sense of unity and exhilaration.

Feature B6.
The gaming machine according to the feature B6 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5,
The data corresponding to the first notification is voice data.

According to feature B6 of the present invention, the first notification is given by sound, so that it can be reliably notified even to players who are looking away from the gaming machine, i.e., players who are not paying attention to the display screen G.

Feature B7.
The gaming machine according to the feature B7 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features B2 to B6,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
The gaming machine includes:
The game machine further includes a second notification control means for issuing a second notification at the end of the first game state, which enables the player to recognize that the game ball should be launched so as to flow down the specified area.

According to feature B7 of the present invention, in so-called right-hand play machines, advantageous playing methods can be notified to the player.

Feature B8.
A gaming machine according to feature B8 is a gaming machine according to feature B7,
The second notification control means (MPU 102, pattern display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is performed by video or image.

According to feature B8 of the present invention, the second notification is made by video or image, so that the player can be drawn to the pattern display device 51.

Feature B9.
The gaming machine according to the feature B9 is a gaming machine according to the features B1 to B8,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
The gaming machine includes:
The device is characterized by further comprising a third notification control means for performing a third notification at the end of the game state, which enables the player to recognize that the game ball should be launched so as to flow down the specified area.

According to feature B9 of the present invention, in so-called right-hand play machines, advantageous playing methods can be notified to the player.

Feature B10.
A gaming machine according to feature B10 is a gaming machine according to feature B9,
The third notification control means is characterized in that the third notification is made by voice.

According to feature B10 of the present invention, the third notification is made by audio, so that it can be reliably notified even to players who are looking away from the gaming machine.

Feature B11.
A gaming machine according to the feature B11 is a gaming machine according to the feature B9 or B10,
The third notification control means is
The present invention is characterized in that after the first notification is made by the first notification means, the third notification is made successively.

According to feature B11 of the present invention, the first and third notifications do not overlap, so the audio notifications do not overlap, preventing the player from not being able to hear at least one of the first and third notifications.

Feature B12.
The gaming machine according to the feature B12 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features B2 to B11,
The gaming machine is,
A selection operation means (operation button 28) for receiving a selection of a presentation type of a second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state;
A performance setting means (MPU 92) for setting the performance received by the selection operation means as a performance of a second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature B12 of the present invention, the presentation of the game state to which the game transitions after the first game state can be selected, thereby expanding the range of choices available to the player and providing presentations that suit the preferences of a wide variety of players, thereby improving interest.

Feature B13.
A gaming machine according to feature B13 is the gaming machine according to feature B12,
A presentation type selection control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is provided for selecting a presentation type of a second game state to be transitioned to after the first game state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized by performing an effect for selecting the effect type during the first gaming state.

According to feature B13 of the present invention group, since the presentation can be selected during the first game state, the next game state can be known during the first game state, and the player's attention can be increased.

Feature B14.
A gaming machine according to feature B14 is a gaming machine according to feature B13,
The effect setting means is characterized in that, if the selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first game state, a predetermined type of effect or the effect being selected by the selection operation means is set as the effect of the second game state to which the game state is transitioned after the first game state.

According to feature B14 of the present invention, if the selection of the type of effect is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first game state, a predetermined type of effect or the effect being selected by the selection operation means is set as the effect of the second game state to which the game transitions after the first game state. Therefore, even if the player does not perform a selection operation, the effect of the second game state to which the game transitions after the first game state can be set.

According to group B of features of the present invention, there is no need to separately store the music data for the effects and the data for the first notification that allows the player to recognize the game status in a storage means, and there is no need to measure time to determine the timing for outputting the first notification. This makes it possible to solve the following problems:

Typically, music data for effects and audio data for notifications (for example, announcements when entering a specific mode) are stored separately in different areas of a storage device such as a ROM, and the notification audio data is played back at the correct timing to notify the player. However, with this conventional method, the amount of audio data stored in the storage device, which has a limited storage capacity, increases, leaving less space for other data (for example, character data and background image data). In addition, the need to time the playback of the notification audio data increases the amount of calculation required, which increases the load on the MPU, CPU, etc.

<Characteristics Group C>
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C1 is
A transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning a game state from a first game state (specific game state) to a second game state (RUSH mode) different from the first game state;
a first notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for performing a first notification (entering a RUSH state) at different timings depending on the type of the second gaming state, the first notification enabling a player to recognize the second gaming state;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

In the gaming machine according to feature C1, the first notification that allows the player to recognize the second gaming state is given at different times depending on the type of the second gaming state, so flexible notification can be given according to the type of the second gaming state.

Feature C2.
A gaming machine according to feature C2 is a gaming machine according to feature C1,
The first notification control means initiates the first notification during the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of feature C2, the first notification is given during the first gaming state, so the player can learn about the second gaming state to which the player transitions after the first gaming state while still in the first gaming state. This can increase the player's attention to the game and heighten the player's anticipation for the next gaming state.

Feature C3.
A gaming machine according to feature C3 is a gaming machine according to feature C2,
The first notification control means is characterized in that it varies a timing of starting the first notification depending on the type of the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of feature C3, the timing of the start of the first notification is made different depending on the type of the second gaming state, so flexible notifications can be made depending on the type of the second gaming state. In addition, because the timing of the start of the first notification is different, the player can enjoy identifying the type of the second gaming state depending on the timing of the start of the first notification, which increases the interest.

Feature C4.
The gaming machine according to the feature C4 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3,
The first notification control means is characterized in that it terminates the first notification when the first gaming state ends.

In the gaming machine according to feature C4, the first notification ends when the first gaming state ends, so the presentation of the second gaming state is not interrupted by the first notification. This allows the player to enjoy the presentation of the second gaming state without being interrupted, which increases the interest of the game.

Feature C5.
A gaming machine according to feature C5 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3,
The first notification control means is characterized in that it terminates the first notification during the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of feature C5, the first notification is terminated during the second gaming state, so the first notification is given from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. This means that the flow from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is not interrupted, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of gaming states, which can increase the interest of the game.

Feature C6.
A gaming machine according to feature C6 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3,
The first notification control means is characterized in that it terminates the first notification during the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of feature C6, the first notification is ended during the first gaming state. Therefore, during the first gaming state, time can be secured for other notifications or effects to be made after the first notification is ended, and by using this secured time to make notifications or effects other than the first notification, it is possible to improve convenience and interest for the player.

Feature C7.
A gaming machine according to feature C7 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
The game machine is characterized by comprising a reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing the music data of the second game state during the first game state.

According to the gaming machine of feature C7, music data for the second gaming state is played during the first gaming state, so the gaming state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the gaming state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the flow of the gaming state. This makes the game more entertaining.

Feature C8.
A gaming machine according to feature C8 is a gaming machine according to feature C7,
The first notification control means controls the first notification so that the first notification ends when the reproduction of the intro part of the music ends.

According to feature C8 of the present invention, the first notification ends when the intro section of the music finishes playing, so the end of the first notification coincides with the end of the intro section of the music, providing a sense of unity and exhilaration.

Feature C9.
A gaming machine according to feature C9 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8,
The first notification is a voice notification.

According to feature C9 of the present invention, the first notification is given by sound, so that it can be reliably notified even to players who are looking away from the gaming machine, i.e., players who are not paying attention to the display screen G.

Feature C10.
A gaming machine according to feature C10 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
The gaming machine includes:
The game machine further comprises a second notification control means (MPU 102, pattern display device 51) for making a second notification that enables the player to recognize that the game ball should be launched so that it flows down the specified area when the first game state ends, or a third notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for making a third notification.

According to feature C10 of the present invention, in so-called right-hand play machines, advantageous playing methods can be notified to the player.

Feature C11.
A gaming machine according to a feature C11 is a gaming machine according to a feature C10,
The second notification control means (MPU 102, pattern display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is performed by video or image.

According to feature C11 of the present invention group, the second notification is made by video or image, so that the player can be drawn to the pattern display device 51.

Feature C12.
A gaming machine according to feature C12 is the gaming machine according to feature C11,
The third notification control means is characterized in that the third notification is made by voice.

According to feature C12 of the present invention, the third notification is made by audio, so that it can be reliably notified even to players who are looking away from the gaming machine, i.e., players who are not paying attention to the display screen G.

Feature C13.
A gaming machine according to feature C13 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C10 to C12,
The third notification control means is configured to cause the third notification to be made successively after the first notification is made by the first notification means.

According to feature C13 of the present invention, the first and third notifications do not overlap, so the audio notifications do not overlap, preventing the player from not being able to hear at least one of the first and third notifications.

Feature C14.
A gaming machine according to feature C14 is a gaming machine according to feature C7,
The first gaming state is a specific gaming state (jackpot gaming) that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state,
The playback control means is characterized in that it controls so that the music data is played during an ending period of the first game state.

According to feature C14 of the present invention group, control is performed so that music data for the second game state (RUSH mode) transitioned to after the first game state (jackpot game) is played during the ending period of the specific game state. In other words, control is performed so that music data for the second game state is played at the end of the first game state. This makes it possible to more effectively transition between modes without interrupting the flow from the specific game state to the game state after the specific game state (RUSH mode), allowing the player to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game states. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C15.
A gaming machine according to feature C15 is the gaming machine according to feature C14,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the music data is reproduced at the start of the ending period.

According to feature C15 of the present invention, the playback control means plays music data at the start of the ending period, so that there is no sense of incongruity even if music playback starts during the first game state, and mode transition can be made more smoothly without interrupting the flow from the first game state to the second game state.

Feature C16.
A gaming machine according to feature C16 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C15,
The gaming machine is,
A selection operation means (operation button 28) for accepting a selection of a presentation type of the second gaming state;
An effect setting means (MPU 92) for setting the effect received by the selection operation means as the effect in the second game state;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature C16 of the present invention, the presentation of the second game state to which the game transitions after the first game state can be selected, broadening the range of choices available to the player and providing presentations that suit the preferences of a wide variety of players, thereby improving interest.

Feature C17.
A gaming machine according to feature C17 is a gaming machine according to feature C16,
A presentation type selection control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is provided for performing a presentation type selection for the second game state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized by performing an effect for selecting the effect type during the first gaming state.

According to feature C17 of the present invention, since the presentation can be selected during the first game state, the presentation of the next game state can be known during the first game state, thereby increasing the player's attention.

Feature C18.
A gaming machine according to feature C18 is a gaming machine according to feature C16 or feature C17,
The effect setting means is characterized in that, if the selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first game state, a predetermined type of effect or the effect being selected by the selection operation means is set as the effect of the game state to be transitioned to after the first game state.

According to feature C18 of the present invention, if the selection of the type of effect is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first game state, a predetermined type of effect or the effect being selected by the selection operation means is set as the effect of the game state to be transitioned to after the first game state, so that even if the player does not perform a selection operation, the effect of the game state to be transitioned to after the first game state can be set.

According to feature group C of the present invention, when the game state transitions from a first game state to a second game state, the timing of the notification of the next game state to the player in advance is varied depending on the type of the second game state. This makes it possible to solve the following problems:

When the game state transitions, players want to know what the next game state (the game state after the transition) will be like. However, the game state is notified only after the game state transitions, which is a notification that lacks flexibility. In addition, the first notification is given at the same time every time, which can become monotonous for players, causing them to lose interest in the first notification, and the player's attention to the game decreases, which does not build anticipation for the next game state.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to the feature D1 is
A transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning a game state from a first game state (specific game state) to a second game state (RUSH mode) different from the first game state;
A reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing music in the second game state;
A special effect execution means (MPU 92, MPU 102, speaker unit 24, pattern display device 51, display screen G) for executing a special effect in the first game state or the second game state according to a relationship between an ending period of the first game state and a playback time of the intro portion of the music;
The present invention is characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1 of the present invention, when transitioning from a first game state to a second game state, a special effect is executed according to the relationship between the ending period of the first game state and the playback time of the intro portion of the music, so that the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2.
The gaming machine according to the feature D2 is the gaming machine according to the feature D1,
The regeneration control means
Reproducing the music from an ending period of the first gaming state;
The special effect execution means includes:
When the reproducing time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the ending period of the first game state, the special performance is executed during the period from the end of the reproducing of the intro part to the start of the second game state.

If the playback time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the ending period of the first game state, the ending period continues even after the playback of the intro part ends, so there is no change in the video presentation when the playback of the A-melody part following the intro part starts, and the feeling of exhilaration when the A-melody part is played is diminished because it is monotonous and lacks change. However, according to feature D2 of the present invention, if the playback time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the ending period of the first game state, a special presentation is executed from the end of the playback of the intro part to the start of the second game state. Therefore, the video presentation changes when the playback of the A-melody part following the intro part starts. In other words, the change in music and the change in the video presentation match. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that the game state (mode) has changed, and the expectation for the game is heightened. In addition, since the change in music and the change in the video presentation match, the game state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of game state flows. This can increase the entertainment value of the game.

Feature D3.
The gaming machine according to the feature D3 is the gaming machine according to the feature D2,
The regeneration control means
Reproducing the music from an ending period of the first gaming state;
The special effect execution means includes:
A special effect between the end of the reproduction of the intro portion and the start of the second game state is a notification that a transition will occur to the next game state.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, the player can know that the game will move to the next game state, the second game state.

Feature D4.
The gaming machine according to the feature D4 is the gaming machine according to the feature D1,
The special effect execution means includes:
When the reproducing time of the intro part of the music is longer than the ending period of the first game state, a special performance is executed at the start of the second game state.

If the playback time of the intro part of the music is longer than the ending period of the first game state, the game state transitions to the second game state before the playback of the intro part is completed, and the video presentation changes suddenly even though there is not much change in the music being played. However, according to feature D4 of the present invention, if the playback time of the intro part of the music is longer than the ending period of the first game state, a special presentation is executed at the start of the second game state. Therefore, even though the playback of the intro part is continuing, the video presentation of the second game state does not start. Therefore, the player can prevent the video presentation of the second game state from starting even though the playback of the intro part has not finished, and the player does not feel uncomfortable because the music presentation and the video presentation do not match. Therefore, the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D5.
The gaming machine according to the feature D5 is a gaming machine according to the feature D4,
The special effect execution means includes:
The special presentation at the start of the second game state is characterized by an announcement of the prize balls won in the first game state.

According to feature D5 of the present invention, the number of prize balls won is displayed as a special effect, so the player can know how many prize balls he or she has won in the first game state.

Feature D6.
The gaming machine according to the feature D6 is the gaming machine according to the feature D1,
When the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the playback time of the intro portion of the music,
The regeneration control means
The music is reproduced from the second gaming state.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, if the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the playback time of the intro part of the music, music is played from the second game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game state from entering the second game state shortly after the intro part starts to be played, and suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. As a result, the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows.

The gaming machine according to the feature D7 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
a notification control means for issuing a second notification (hit right) to enable the player to recognize that the game ball should be shot so as to flow down the predetermined area;
The notification control means
The volume of the second notification is controlled to be lower than normal.

According to feature D7 of the present invention, by making the volume of the right-hit navigation for the first RUSH smaller than normal when entering the second game state, it is possible to prevent the voice of the right-hit navigation for the RUSH saying "Please hit right" from becoming irritating to the player when entering the RUSH, and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Feature D8.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to the feature D8 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6,
The present invention is characterized by having an alarm control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) that issues a first alarm (entering RUSH) at different times depending on the type of the first game state, enabling the player to recognize the second game state.

The length of the ending period may differ depending on the type of jackpot, specifically the type of special symbol and whether the mode is a high probability mode (high probability state) or a low probability mode (low probability state). In such a case, if the first notification is made without considering the length of the ending period, there is a risk that the first notification will be made at an awkward timing, such as between the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). However, according to feature D1 of the present invention group, the first notification is made at different times depending on the type of the first game state, so that the first notification can be made without causing any discomfort to the player, and interest can be improved.

Feature D9.
A gaming machine according to the feature D9 is a gaming machine according to the feature D8,
The notification control means is characterized in that it performs the first notification at different timings depending on the length of an ending period of the first gaming state.

According to feature D9 of the present invention group, the notification control means issues the first notification at different times depending on the length of the ending period of the jackpot game, thereby reducing the risk of the first notification being issued at an awkward timing, such as the first notification being issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification being issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). Therefore, the first notification can be issued without causing any discomfort to the player, improving interest.

Feature D10.
A gaming machine according to a feature D10 is a gaming machine according to a feature D9,
The notification control means performs the first notification at different timings depending on whether a length of an ending period of the first game state is shorter than a time required for the first notification.

According to feature D10 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification at different timings depending on whether the length of the ending period of the jackpot game is shorter than the time required for the first notification. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of the first notification being made at an awkward timing, such as the first notification being made across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification being made after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). As a result, the first notification can be made without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, improving interest.

Feature D11.
A gaming machine according to a feature D11 is a gaming machine according to a feature D10,
The notification control means is characterized in that if the length of the ending period of the first game state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, it makes the first notification during the ending period, and if the length of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the time required for the first notification, it makes the first notification after the ending period has elapsed.

According to feature D11 of the present invention group, the notification control means issues the first notification during the ending period if the length of the ending period of the jackpot game is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, and issues the first notification after the ending period has elapsed if the length of the ending period of the jackpot game is shorter than the time required for the first notification. This reliably prevents the first notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or when the first notification is issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). This makes it possible to increase interest without causing discomfort to the player.

Feature D12.
A gaming machine according to a feature D12 is a gaming machine according to a feature D11,
The notification control means is characterized in that it terminates the first notification when an ending period of the first game state ends.

According to feature D12 of the present invention, the notification control means ends the first notification when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, so that the end of the ending period of the jackpot game and the end of the first notification coincide with each other. This allows the player to feel a sense of unity and exhilaration.

Feature D13.
A gaming machine according to a feature D13 is a gaming machine according to a feature D12,
The notification control means is characterized in that it terminates the first notification during an ending period of the first game state.

According to the gaming machine of feature D13, the first notification is terminated during the jackpot game period. Therefore, during the jackpot game period, time can be secured for other notifications or effects to be made after the first notification is terminated, and by using this secured time to make notifications or effects other than the first notification, it is possible to improve convenience and interest for the player.

Feature D14.
The gaming machine according to the feature D14 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features D8 to D13,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
The notification control means
The present invention is characterized in that a second notification (hit to the right) is given to enable the player to recognize that the game ball should be shot so as to flow down the specified area.

According to feature D14 of the present invention, in so-called right-hand play machines, advantageous playing methods can be notified to the player.

Feature D15.
A gaming machine according to feature D15 is a gaming machine according to feature D14,
The notification control means is characterized in that when the length of the ending period of the first game state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification, it performs the first notification and the second notification during the ending period.

According to feature D15 of the present invention group, the notification control means issues the first and second notifications during the ending period if the length of the ending period of the jackpot game is not shorter than the time required for the first and second notifications, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the first or second notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as the first or second notification being issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first or second notification being issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). This makes it possible to increase interest without causing discomfort to the player.

Feature D16.
The gaming machine according to the feature D16 is a gaming machine according to the feature D14 or the feature D15,
The notification control means is characterized in that, when the length of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification, but is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, it makes the first notification during the ending period and makes the second notification after the ending period has elapsed.

According to feature D16 of the present invention group, if the length of the ending period of the jackpot game is shorter than the time required for the first and second notifications, but not shorter than the time required for the first notification, the notification control means issues the first notification during the ending period and the second notification after the ending period has elapsed. This reliably prevents the first or second notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first or second notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or when the first or second notification is issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). This makes it possible to increase interest without causing discomfort to the player.

Feature D17.
A gaming machine according to feature D17 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D14 to D16,
The notification control means is characterized in that, when the length of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the time required for the first notification, the first notification and the second notification are made after the ending period has elapsed.

According to feature D17 of the present invention group, if the length of the ending period of the jackpot game is shorter than the time required for the first notification, the notification control means issues the first and second notifications after the ending period has elapsed. This reliably prevents the first or second notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first or second notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or when the first or second notification is issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). This makes it possible to increase interest without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature D18.
The gaming machine according to the feature D18 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D17,
The notification control means is characterized in that after the first notification is made by the first notification means, the second notification is made successively.

According to feature D18 of the present invention group, the first and second notifications do not overlap, which prevents the player from failing to recognize at least one of the first and second notifications.

Feature D19.
A gaming machine according to feature D19 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D14 to D18,
At least one of the first notification and the second notification is a voice notification.

According to feature D19 of the present invention, at least one of the first and second notifications is given by sound, so that it is possible to reliably notify a player who is looking away from the gaming machine, i.e., a player who is not paying attention to the display screen G.

Feature D20.
The gaming machine according to the feature D20 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D19,
The notification control means (MPU 102, pattern display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is made by video or image.

According to feature D20 of the present invention group, the second notification is made by video or image, so that the player can be drawn to the pattern display device 51.

Feature D21.
The gaming machine according to the feature D21 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features D8 to D20,
The reproduction control means reproduces music data of the second game state during an ending period of the first game state.

According to feature D21 of the present invention, the music data for the RUSH mode to which the mode transitions after a jackpot game is controlled to be played during the ending period of the jackpot game. In other words, the music data for the RUSH mode is controlled to be played at the end of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to more effectively transition between modes without interrupting the flow from the jackpot game to the RUSH mode after the jackpot game, and allows the player to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of gameplay states. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D22.
A gaming machine according to a feature D22 is a gaming machine according to a feature D21,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that it causes the music data to be reproduced from the start of the ending period.

According to feature D22 of the present invention, the playback control means plays music data from the beginning of the ending period, so there is no sense of incongruity even if music starts playing during the jackpot game period, and the mode transition can be made more smoothly without interrupting the flow from the jackpot game state to the RUSH mode.

Feature D23.
The gaming machine according to the feature D23 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features D8 to D22,
The gaming machine is,
A selection operation means (operation button 28) for accepting a selection of a presentation type of the second gaming state;
An effect setting means (MPU 92) for setting the effect received by the selection operation means as the effect in the second game state;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature D23 of the present invention, the type of presentation for the RUSH mode to which the game transitions after a big win can be selected. This broadens the range of choices available to players, making it possible to provide presentations that suit the preferences of a wide variety of players and increasing the game's interest.

Feature D24.
A gaming machine according to the feature D24 is a gaming machine according to the feature D23,
A presentation type selection control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is provided for performing a presentation type selection for the second game state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized by performing an effect for selecting the effect type during the first gaming state.

According to feature D24 of the present invention, since the effects can be selected during the jackpot game, the player can know the effects of the next game state, RUSH mode, during the jackpot game, and the player's attention can be increased.

Feature D25.
The gaming machine according to the feature D25 is a gaming machine according to the feature D23 or the feature D24,
The effect setting means is characterized in that, if the selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first game state, a predetermined type of effect or the effect being selected by the selection operation means is set as the effect of the game state to be transitioned to after the first game state.

According to feature D25 of the present invention, if the selection of the type of presentation is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the jackpot game, a predetermined type of presentation or the presentation being selected by the selection operation means is set as the presentation of the game state to which the game will be transitioned after the jackpot game, so that even if the player does not perform a selection operation, the presentation of the RUSH mode to which the game will be transitioned after the jackpot game can be set.

According to feature group D of the present invention, when transitioning from a first game state to a second game state, a special effect is executed according to the ending period of the first game state and the playback time of the intro portion of the music. This allows the game state to transition smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows. This makes it possible to solve the following problems:

Normally, the presentation of images, music, lamp lighting patterns, etc. differs for each game state. For this reason, when the game state changes, the presentation also changes. However, in conventional gaming machines, when the game state changes, the presentation of images, music, etc. suddenly changes, interrupting the flow of presentation. For the player, this interrupts the flow of the game, which can reduce the interest of the player. It cannot be said that interest has been sufficiently improved in this regard, and there is still room for improvement.

Furthermore, according to the feature group D of the present invention, when the game state transitions from the first game state to the second game state, the timing of the first notification that notifies the player of the next game state in advance is varied depending on the type of the first game state. This makes it possible to solve the following problems:

When the game state transitions, players want to know what the next game state (the game state after the transition) will be like. However, the game state is notified only after the game state transitions, which is a notification that lacks flexibility. In addition, the first notification is given at the same time every time, which can become monotonous for players, causing them to lose interest in the first notification, and the player's attention to the game decreases, which does not build anticipation for the next game state.

In addition, the length of the ending period may differ depending on the type of jackpot, specifically the type of special symbol and whether the mode is a high probability mode (high probability state) or a low probability mode (low probability state). In such a case, if the first notification (entry into RUSH) is made without considering the length of the ending period, there is a risk that the first notification (entry into RUSH) will be made at an awkward timing. As a result, it will cause a feeling of awkwardness to the player, and will reduce interest.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to feature E1 is
A transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning a game state from a first game state (specific game state) to a second game state (RUSH mode) different from the first game state;
A reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing music in the second game state;
An operation means (operation button 28) for receiving a selection of a presentation type of the second gaming state;
A special effect execution means (MPU 92, MPU 102, speaker unit 24, pattern display device 51, display screen G) for executing a special effect in the first game state or the second game state according to the timing when the type of effect in the second game state is selected;
The present invention is characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1 of the present invention, when transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, a special effect is executed according to the timing at which the type of effect for the second game state is selected, so the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state transitions. This makes it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

Feature E2.
The gaming machine according to the feature E2 is the gaming machine according to the feature E1,
The regeneration control means
Reproducing the music from an ending period of the first gaming state;
The special effect execution means includes:
When the reproducing time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state after the type of the performance of the second game state is selected, the special performance is executed during the period from the end of the reproducing of the intro part to the start of the second game state.

If the playback time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state, the ending period continues even after the playback of the intro part ends, so there is no change in the video presentation when the playback of the A-melody part following the intro part starts, and the feeling of exhilaration when the A-melody part is played is diminished because it is monotonous and lacks change. However, according to feature E2 of the present invention, if the playback time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the ending period of the first game state, a special presentation is executed from the end of the playback of the intro part to the start of the second game state. Therefore, the video presentation changes when the playback of the A-melody part following the intro part starts. In other words, the change in music and the change in the video presentation match. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that the game state (mode) has changed, and the expectation for the game is heightened. In addition, since the change in music and the change in the video presentation match, the game state can be transitioned without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of game state flows. This can increase the entertainment value of the game.

Feature E3.
The gaming machine according to the feature E3 is the gaming machine according to the feature E2,
The regeneration control means
Reproducing the music from an ending period of the first gaming state;
The special effect execution means includes:
A special effect between the end of the reproduction of the intro portion and the start of the second game state is a notification that a transition to the next game state will occur.

According to feature E3 of the present invention, the player can know that a transition to the next gaming state, the second gaming state, will occur.

Feature E4.
A gaming machine according to feature E4 is a gaming machine according to feature E1,
The special effect execution means includes:
When the reproducing time of the intro part of the music is longer than the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state after the type of performance of the second game state is selected, a special performance is executed at the start of the second game state.

If the playback time of the intro part of the music is longer than the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state, the game state transitions to the second game state before the playback of the intro part is completed, and the video presentation changes suddenly even though there is not much change in the music being played. However, according to feature E4 of the present invention, if the playback time of the intro part of the music is longer than the ending period of the first game state, a special presentation is executed at the start of the second game state. Therefore, even though the playback of the intro part is continuing, the video presentation of the second game state does not start. Therefore, the player can prevent the video presentation of the second game state from starting even though the playback of the intro part has not finished, and the player does not feel uncomfortable because the music presentation and the video presentation do not match. Therefore, the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows. This improves the interest of the game.

Feature E5.
A gaming machine according to feature E5 is a gaming machine according to feature E4,
The special effect execution means includes:
The special presentation at the start of the second game state is characterized by an announcement of the prize balls won in the first game state.

According to feature E5 of the present invention, the number of prize balls won is displayed as a special effect, so the player can know how many prize balls he or she has won in the first game state.

Feature E6.
A gaming machine according to feature E6 is a gaming machine according to feature E1,
When the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the playback time of the intro portion of the music,
The regeneration control means
The music is reproduced from the second gaming state.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, if the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the playback time of the intro part of the music, music is played from the second game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game state from entering the second game state shortly after the start of playback of the intro part, and suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. As a result, the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows.

The gaming machine according to the feature E7 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
a notification control means for issuing a second notification (hit right) to enable the player to recognize that the game ball should be shot so as to flow down the predetermined area;
The notification control means
The volume of the second notification is controlled to be lower than normal.

According to feature E7 of the present invention, by making the volume of the right-hit navigation for the first RUSH smaller than normal when entering the second game state, it is possible to prevent the voice of the right-hit navigation for the RUSH saying "Please hit right" from becoming irritating to the player when entering the RUSH, and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Feature E8.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature E8 is a gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, which is provided with a notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for making a first notification (entering RUSH) that enables a player to recognize the second gaming state,
The notification control means is characterized in that it performs the first notification at different timings depending on the timing at which the presentation type of the second game state is selected.

There are pachinko machines in which the type of presentation for the RUSH mode to which the player transitions after a jackpot game is selected during the ending period of the jackpot game. In such a case, if the first notification is made without considering the timing at which the type of presentation for the RUSH mode is selected, in other words the length of time remaining in the ending period, there is a risk that the first notification will be made at an unnatural timing, such as between the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). However, according to feature E8 of the present invention group, the first notification is made at different timings depending on the timing at which the selection of the type of presentation for the second game state is accepted, so that the first notification can be made without causing the player any discomfort, thereby improving interest.

Feature E9.
A gaming machine according to feature E9 is a gaming machine according to feature E1,
The notification control means performs the first notification at different timings depending on the length of time remaining in the ending period of the first game state.

According to feature E9 of the present invention group, the notification control means issues the first notification at different timings depending on the length of time remaining in the ending period of the jackpot game, and therefore the first notification is issued without taking into account the length of time remaining in the ending period, preventing the first notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed).

Feature E10.
A gaming machine according to feature E10 is a gaming machine according to feature E2,
The notification control means is characterized in that it performs the first notification at different timings depending on whether the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the time required for the first notification.

According to feature E10 of the present invention group, the notification control means issues the first notification at different timings depending on whether the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot game is shorter than the time required for the first notification, so that the first notification is issued without taking into account the remaining time of the ending period, and it is possible to prevent the first notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first notification is issued between the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or when the first notification is issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed).

Feature E11.
A gaming machine according to feature E11 is a gaming machine according to feature E10,
The notification control means is characterized in that if the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, it makes the first notification during the ending period, and if the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the time required for the first notification, it makes the first notification after the ending period has elapsed.

According to feature E11 of the present invention group, the notification control means issues the first notification during the ending period if the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot game is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, and issues the first notification after the ending period has elapsed if the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot game is shorter than the time required for the first notification. This reliably prevents the first notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and RUSH mode, or when the first notification is issued after entering RUSH mode (slightly delayed). This makes it possible to improve interest without causing discomfort to the player.

Feature E12.
A gaming machine according to feature E12 is the gaming machine according to feature E11,
The notification control means is characterized in that it terminates the first notification when an ending period of the first game state ends.

According to feature E12 of the present invention, the notification control means ends the first notification when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, so that the end of the ending period of the jackpot game and the end of the first notification coincide with each other. This allows the player to feel a sense of unity and exhilaration.

Feature E13.
A gaming machine according to feature E13 is the gaming machine according to feature E11,
The notification control means is characterized in that it terminates the first notification during an ending period of the first game state.

According to the gaming machine of feature E13, the first notification is ended during the jackpot game period. Therefore, during the jackpot game period, time can be secured for other notifications or effects to be made after the first notification is ended, and by using this secured time to make notifications or effects other than the first notification, it is possible to improve convenience and interest for the player.

Feature E14.
A gaming machine according to feature E14 is a gaming machine according to any one of features E8 to E13,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
The notification control means
The present invention is characterized in that a second notification (hit to the right) is given to enable the player to recognize that the game ball should be shot so as to flow down the specified area.

According to feature E14 of the present invention, in so-called right-hand play machines, advantageous playing methods can be notified to the player.

Feature E15.
A gaming machine according to feature E15 is a gaming machine according to feature E14,
The notification control means is characterized in that when the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification, it makes the first notification and the second notification during the ending period.

According to feature E15 of the present invention group, the notification control means issues the first and second notifications during the ending period if the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot game is not shorter than the time required for the first and second notifications, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the first or second notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first or second notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or when the first or second notification is issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). This makes it possible to increase interest without causing discomfort to the player.

Feature E16.
A gaming machine according to feature E16 is a gaming machine according to feature E14 or feature E15,
The notification control means is characterized in that, when the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, the first notification is made during the ending period, and the second notification is made after the ending period has elapsed.

According to feature E16 of the present invention group, if the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot game is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, the notification control means issues the first notification during the ending period and issues the second notification after the ending period has elapsed. This reliably prevents the first or second notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first or second notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or when the first or second notification is issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). This makes it possible to increase interest without causing discomfort to the player.

Feature E17.
A gaming machine according to feature E17 is a gaming machine according to any one of features E10 to E16,
The notification control means is characterized in that when the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification, and is also shorter than the time required for the first notification, the notification control means makes the first notification and the second notification after the ending period has elapsed.

According to feature E17 of the present invention group, if the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot game is shorter than the time required for the first and second notifications, the notification control means issues the first and second notifications after the ending period has elapsed. This reliably prevents the first or second notification from being issued at an awkward timing, such as when the first or second notification is issued across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or when the first or second notification is issued after entering the RUSH mode (slightly delayed). This makes it possible to increase interest without causing discomfort to the player.

Feature E18.
A gaming machine according to feature E18 is a gaming machine according to any one of features E10 to E17,
The notification control means is configured to make the second notification successively after the first notification is made by the first notification means.

According to feature E18 of the present invention, the first and second notifications do not overlap, which prevents the player from failing to recognize at least one of the first and second notifications.

Feature E19.
A gaming machine according to feature E19 is a gaming machine according to any one of features E14 to E18,
At least one of the first notification and the second notification is a voice notification.

According to feature E19 of the present invention, at least one of the first and second notifications is given by audio, so that it is possible to reliably notify a player who is looking away from the gaming machine, i.e., a player who is not paying attention to the display screen G.

Feature E20.
A gaming machine according to feature E20 is a gaming machine according to any one of features E14 to E19,
The notification control means (MPU 102, pattern display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is made by video or image.

According to feature E20 of the present invention, the second notification is made by video or image, so that the player can be drawn to the pattern display device 51.

Feature E21.
A gaming machine according to feature E21 is a gaming machine according to any one of features E8 to E20,
The reproduction control means reproduces music data of the second game state during an ending period of the first game state.

According to feature E21 of the present invention, the music data for the RUSH mode to which the mode transitions after a jackpot game is controlled to be played during the ending period of the jackpot game. In other words, the music data for the RUSH mode is controlled to be played at the end of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to more effectively transition between modes without interrupting the flow from the jackpot game to the RUSH mode after the jackpot game, and allows the player to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game states. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E22.
A gaming machine according to feature E22 is the gaming machine according to feature E21,
The playback control means is characterized in that the music data is played back after a presentation type of the second gaming state is selected.

According to feature E22 of the present invention group, the playback control means plays music data after the type of presentation of the second game state is selected, so there is no sense of incongruity even if music playback starts during the first game state. Also, since the music data for the second game state is played after the player selects the type of presentation, a sense of exhilaration can be obtained and interest can be increased.

Feature E23.
The gaming machine according to the feature E23 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features E8 to E22,
The gaming machine is,
The game device is characterized by comprising an effect setting means (MPU 92) for setting the effect received by the selection operation means as the effect of the second game state.

According to feature E23 of the present invention, the RUSH mode presentation to which the game transitions after a jackpot game can be selected, broadening the range of choices available to players and providing presentations that suit the preferences of a wide variety of players, thereby increasing interest.

Feature E24.
A gaming machine according to feature E24 is the gaming machine according to feature E23,
A presentation type selection control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is provided for performing a presentation type selection for the second game state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized by performing an effect for selecting the effect type during the first gaming state.

According to feature E24 of the present invention, the effects can be selected during the jackpot game, so that the effects of the next game state, RUSH mode, can be known during the jackpot game, thereby increasing the player's attention.

Feature E25.
A gaming machine according to feature E25 is a gaming machine according to feature E23 or feature E24,
The effect setting means is characterized in that, if the selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the end of the ending period of the first game state, a predetermined type of effect or the effect being selected by the selection operation means is set as the effect of the game state to be transitioned to after the first game state.

According to feature E25 of the present invention, if the selection of the type of presentation is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the jackpot game, a predetermined type of presentation or the presentation being selected by the selection operation means is set as the presentation of the game state to which the game will be transitioned after the jackpot game, so that even if the player does not perform a selection operation, the presentation of the RUSH mode to which the game will be transitioned after the jackpot game can be set.

Feature E26.
The gaming machine according to feature E26 (pachinko machine 10) is
A transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning a game state from a first game state (specific game state) to a second game state (RUSH mode) different from the first game state;
A notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for performing a first notification (entering RUSH) that allows a player to recognize the second game state;
An operation means (operation button 28) for receiving a selection of a presentation type of the second gaming state;
A reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing music data for the second gaming state after the selection of the type of performance for the second gaming state;
The present invention is characterized by comprising:

According to feature E26 of the present invention group, the playback control means plays music data after the type of presentation for the second game state is selected, so there is no sense of incongruity even if music playback starts during the first game state. Also, since the music data for the second game state is played after the player selects the type of presentation, a sense of exhilaration can be obtained and interest can be increased.

According to group E of features of the present invention, when transitioning from a first gaming state to a second gaming state, a special effect is executed according to the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state and the playback time of the intro portion of the music. This allows the gaming state to transition smoothly without interrupting the flow of the gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy gaming without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of gaming state flows. This makes it possible to solve the following problems:

Normally, the presentation of images, music, lamp lighting patterns, etc. differs for each game state. For this reason, when the game state changes, the presentation also changes. However, in conventional gaming machines, when the game state changes, the presentation of images, music, etc. suddenly changes, interrupting the flow of presentation. For the player, this interrupts the flow of the game, which can reduce interest. It cannot be said that interest has been sufficiently improved in this regard, and there is still room for improvement.

Furthermore, according to the feature E group of the present invention, the selection of the presentation type of the second game state is accepted, and the timing of the first notification that notifies the player of the next game state in advance is changed depending on the timing of accepting the selection operation of the presentation type of the second game state. This makes it possible to solve the following problems:

When the game state transitions, players want to know what the next game state (the game state after the transition) will be like. However, the game state is notified only after the game state transitions, which is a notification that lacks flexibility. In addition, the first notification is given at the same time every time, which can become monotonous for players, causing them to lose interest in the first notification, and the player's attention to the game decreases, which does not build anticipation for the next game state.

In addition, there are pachinko machines in which the type of presentation for the RUSH mode to which the player transitions after a jackpot game is selected during the ending period of the jackpot game. In such cases, if the first notification is made without considering the timing at which the type of presentation for the RUSH mode is confirmed, in other words, the length of time remaining in the ending period, there is a risk that the first notification (entry into RUSH mode) will be made at an odd timing. As a result, this will cause the player to feel odd and reduce interest.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to feature F1 is
A transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning a game state from a first game state (specific game state) to a second game state (RUSH mode) different from the first game state;
a playback control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for playing music in the second game state;
The regeneration control means
When the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the playback time of the intro portion of the music, the music is played back from the second game state.

According to feature F1 of the present invention group, if the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the playback time of the intro part of the music, music is played from the second game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game state from entering the second game state shortly after the start of playback of the intro part, and suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. As a result, the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows.

Feature F2.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to feature F2 is a gaming machine according to feature F1,
An operation means (operation button 28) for receiving a selection of a presentation type of the second gaming state is provided;
The regeneration control means
The music is reproduced from the second game state in response to the timing at which the type of presentation for the second game state is selected.

According to feature F2 of the present invention group, music is played from the second game state depending on the timing when the presentation type of the second game state is selected, so it is possible to prevent the game state from entering the second game state shortly after the intro portion starts to be played, and suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. As a result, the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows.

Feature F3.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to feature F3 is a gaming machine according to feature F2,
The regeneration control means
When the reproducing time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state after the presentation type of the second game state is selected, the music is reproduced from the second game state.

According to feature F3 of the present invention group, if the remaining time of the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the playback time of the intro part of the music, music is played from the second game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game state from entering the second game state shortly after the start of playback of the intro part, and suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. As a result, the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows.

Feature F4.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to feature F4 is a gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The game device is characterized by comprising a special effect execution means (MPU 92, MPU 102, speaker unit 24, pattern display device 51, display screen G) which executes a special effect in the first game state or the second game state depending on the relationship between the ending period of the first game state and the playback time of the intro portion of the music.

According to feature F4 of the present invention, when transitioning from a first game state to a second game state, a special effect is executed according to the relationship between the ending period of the first game state and the playback time of the intro portion of the music, so that the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows. This makes it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

A gaming machine according to feature F5 is a gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A large prize opening (381) for awarding prize balls upon winning in the first game state is provided at a position where the game balls launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the large prize opening (381);
a notification control means for issuing a second notification (hit right) to enable the player to recognize that the game ball should be shot so as to flow down the predetermined area;
The notification control means
The volume of the second notification is controlled to be lower than normal.

According to feature F5 of the present invention, by making the volume of the right-hit navigation for the first RUSH smaller than normal when entering the second game state, it is possible to prevent the voice of the right-hit navigation for the RUSH saying "Please hit right" from becoming irritating to the player when entering the RUSH, and to prevent the player from losing interest.

According to feature group F of the present invention, if the ending period of the first game state is shorter than the playback time of the intro portion of the music, music is played from the second game state. This prevents the game state from entering the second game state shortly after the intro portion starts to be played, suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. As a result, the game state can be transitioned smoothly without interrupting the flow of the game state, allowing the player to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of game state flows.

Normally, the presentation of images, music, lamp lighting patterns, etc. differs for each game state. For this reason, when the game state changes, the presentation also changes. However, in conventional gaming machines, when the game state changes, the presentation of images, music, etc. suddenly changes, interrupting the flow of presentation. For the player, this interrupts the flow of the game, which can reduce the interest of the player. It cannot be said that interest has been sufficiently improved in this regard, and there is still room for improvement.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used in gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

10... Pachinko machine, 25b... Push button, 35... General winning opening, 36... First start opening, 37... Second start opening, 38... Variable winning device, 38a... Large winning opening, 38b... Opening and closing door, 38c... Variable winning drive unit, 39... Outlet, 51... Pattern display device, 57, 57B1, 57B2... Touch sensor, 60... Main control device, 62... MPU, 90... Sound and light emission control device, 92... MPU, 100... Display control device, 102... MPU.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of transitioning from a first gaming state, which is a winning game in which a prize ball can be awarded by winning a variable winning device, to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, configured to be able to play predetermined audio data from an introduction portion corresponding to the start of a specific period from a predetermined point in time to the end of the first gaming state, and configured to be able to execute a special effect suggesting the start of the second gaming state when the introduction portion and subsequent portions are played when the specific period of the first gaming state is longer than the length of the introduction portion of the predetermined audio data.

Images